Home

R&S FSV-K73 - Rohde & Schwarz Norway

1. CPICH The CPICH softkey sets the marker to the CPICH channel The softkey is only available for R amp S FSV K72 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CPICh on page 123 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y on page 122 PCCPCH Sets the marker to the PCCPCH channel Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion PCCPch on page 123 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y on page 122 Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 70 R amp S FSV K73 Configuration of 3GPP FDD UE Measurements a SSS SSE a a ee Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 Min Sets the active marker delta marker to the minimum of the selected trace Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum PEAK on page 119 Next Min Sets the active marker delta marker to the next minimum of the selected trace Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum NEXT on page 119 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum NEXT on page 133 Next Min Mode Sets the mode for the Next Min softkey Three settings are available lt Sets the active marker delta marker to the next minimum left to the marker of the selected trace abs Sets the active marker delta marker to the next higher minimum of the selected trace gt Sets the active marker delta marker to the next minimum right to the marker of the selected trace Remote command CALC MARK MIN LEFT
2. STATusOUEGtonable GNCTEMENO 184 eh RR RUE EE RE 214 TRAC lt n gt DATAY sciscsscenseed csccdscstatesenctede that a eel bees Atal athe ace as ede 185 RER RN ERT 186 WHRRAG EE ENER 187 NEE RK RK 187 TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACe lt n gt DATA NEE ENER 191 TRlGoernzlZSEOuencel DBBbower HOL Doft 207 TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence HOLDOff TIME 208 TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence IF Power HOL Dot 208 TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis eee cece eeeeeceseeeeaeeceeeeeeeeeeaeseaeeseeeseaeesseeessaeesnneseaes 208 TRiGger lt n gt SEQuence LEVel BBPOWEN cicicscsscccccecccstecssseesscccesecesansesstsontsasccedostenstesessecascusescersuseneiens dees TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence LEVel EXTernal TRIGger lt n SEQUENCE SLOP C iis ciiccccctetsactecveeunceeiek castes sated sare dbasondacdvnctostesabdvasesenstesaa erer Eege TRiIGgersn gt ESEQUENCE SOURCC eegerueusureruer gert geet e eege eer E ar a dE SENSe JADJUStALL 210s cA aeaa E cede ae a eh aad IGENZGe IAD Just COhNFouratonHvGTeressl Oe 173 IGENZGe IADJustCOhNFouratonHvGTeress Ufer 173 IEN Ge IAD lust CONEioure L Eve DUbaton 174 SENSE JADJ St LEVE DEE 174 SENS AVERa En COUN TE 174 SENSe AVERage lt n gt TYPE SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VID O AAA 177 IEN Ge IDGANDwicdtblDWwlDtb ViDeo AUTO 178 IEN Ge IGANDwicdtblDGWwlDtb ViDeohATlo 178 IEN Ge IDGANDwiblDWIDOTRE Solution 175 IEN Ge IDGANDwicblDWIDODTR
3. SENSe CDPower LCODe VALue lt ScramblingCode gt This command defines the scrambling code in hexadecimal format Parameters lt ScramblingCode gt Range HO to H1fff RST 0 Example CDP LCOD H2 Mode WCDMA Manual operation See Sync Scrambling Settings on page 44 See Scrambling Code on page 44 See Format on page 44 SENSe CDPower LEVel ADJust This command adjusts the reference level to the measured channel power This ensures that the settings of the RF attenuation and the reference level are optimally adjusted to the signal level without overloading the R amp S FSV or limiting the dynamic range by an S N ratio that is too small Example CDP LEV ADJ Adjusts the reference level Mode CDMA EVDO TDS WCDMA Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 164 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 a SS SS SS SS SS a a ae ee ee ee SENSe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 SENSe CDPower MAPPing lt SignalComponent gt This command switches between and Q component of the signal Parameters lt SignalComponent gt Q RST Q Example CDP MAPP Q Mode CDMA WCDMA SENSe CDPower NORMalize lt boolean gt This command activates or deactivates the elimination of the IQ offset from the signal Parameters lt ON OFF gt RST OFF Example CDP NORM ON Activates normalization Mode CDMA EVDO TDS WCDMA Manual operation See Demod Settings on page 47 See Normalize
4. c ccceeeeeeeeees 34 7 1 Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 seeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 35 1 2 RF MGaSureme nt vi sisias cccccies ciecsccsseseavecavccenes diesvecenlce tauveeveensceecccccetues aa aauina aina aaaea 77 8 Remote Control Commands R amp S ES KI ee 103 81 NOtatlo nies crenis Rivest tests EEN a a iets cl ee EE EES 104 8 2 CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 ccccccsssseeecssseeeeessseeeessseeeesssseeeetsssaeeeees 106 8 3 CONFigure WCDPower subsystem R amp S FSV K73 c ccscessssessseesseeesseeseneees 153 84 INSTrument SUDSYStOIMN iscccciccessscccccecesacsececcedescsectenceeaeaseccececseasucceieedsescteecestseneneieesd 158 8 5 SENSe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 ccccsscccsseeessseeeesseeeessseeseseeeeeessaeeeessessensaaeeees 159 8 6 STATus QUEStionable subsystem R amp S ESVAK73 NEEN NENNEN 184 8 7 TRACe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 cccccssssesssceeesseeessseeseseeeessseseeseeeeessseaeeseeenss 185 Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 3 8 8 10 Other Commands Referenced in this Manuall ccccesseseseessseeessseresseeneseeeee 195 Error SS ACS a ca acca casas ee 215 LC Lek E 216 Listof COMMUN ccc ete ce cece cscs sencexreecicetsexntceseaseeecteeeaceemnees 217 io E 222 R amp S FSV K73 Preface Documentation Overview 1 Preface 1 1 Documentation Overview The user documentation for the R amp S FSV is divided as follows e Quick Sta
5. e Incorrectly set level e Incorrectly set scrambling code e Incorrectly set values for Q INVERT or SIDE BAND INVERT e Invalid signal at input 2 Not used 3 to4 Not used 5 Incorrect Pilot Symbol This bit is set when one or more of the received pilot symbols are not equal to the specified pilot symbols of the 3GPP standard Possible reasons e Incorrectly sent pilot symbols in the received frame e Low signal to noise ratio SNR of the WCDMA signal e One or more code channels has a significantly lower power level compared to the total power The incorrect pilots are detected in these channels because of low channel SNR e One or more channels are sent with high power ramping In slots with low relative power to total power the pilot symbols might be detected incorrectly check the signal quality by using the symbol constellation display 6 to 14 Not used 15 This bit is always 0 8 7 TRACe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 The TRACe subsystem controls access to the instruments internal trace memory TRACES DATA eccna a eae eain a sb Taar EE shit dasa adnan ces 185 lte E KEN 186 E A E 187 EES 187 TRAC Sie DA EN 188 EI sn sci via E Eege 190 EEN getN 191 EENEG AE de 191 TRACe lt n gt DATA lt DataType gt This query reads trace data out of the instrument The result depends on the specified data type see also chapter 7 1 3 Measurement Modes in Code Domain Analyzer on page 51 Oe iS Operat
6. 7 1 5 Softkeys of the Amplitude Menu AMPT key R amp S FSV K73 The AMPT key opens a submenu to set the level Some softkey functions are not available in CDP mode Refer to the description of the AMPT key in the base unit for information on the other softkeys available for RF meas urements ROF LGV E 61 RS tO EE 61 a TEE 61 ei d du 61 L AU 62 Preamp OMON creissensa wwascbesaaxsannddsdauasuousuadeasiaaddeentassaa 62 RF Atten Manual Mech Att Manual 62 RF Atten Auto Mech Att Auto 62 E i ON E EE 62 El Atten Mode Auto Man 22 iinet ranean dade cheese biases disdaeee eden eet 63 PREM Level ONGSL ciinii siaii aE EEN ENEE Aen 63 PIU ANC Jorane e a aap en EAA EA i AA E T 63 Ref Level Opens an edit dialog box to enter the reference level in the current unit dBm dBuV etc The reference level is the maximum value the AD converter can handle without distortion of the measured value Signal levels above this value will not be measured correctly which is indicated by the IFOVL status display Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel on page 198 Scaling Opens a submenu to define the amplitude scaling type Ref Value Scaling The Ref Value softkey opens an edit dialog box to adjust the reference value DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RVALue on page 199 Y per Div Scaling The Y PER DIV softkey opens an edit dialog box to change the range per
7. CF Stepsize Opens a submenu to set the step size of the center frequency The step size defines the value by which the center frequency is increased or decreased when the arrow keys are pressed When you use the rotary knob the center frequency changes in steps of 10 of the Center Frequency Stepsize The step size can be set to a fraction of the span span gt 0 or a fraction of the resolution bandwidth span 0 or it can be set to a fixed value manually Apart from the Center Marker and Manual softkeys the other softkeys are displayed depending on the selected frequency span This softkey is available for RF measurements 0 1 Span span gt 0 CF Stepsize Sets the step size for the center frequency to 10 of the span Remote command FREQ CENT STEP LINK SPAN see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK on page 179 FREQ CENT STEP LINK FACT 10PCT see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK FACTor on page 180 0 1 RBW span gt 0 CF Stepsize Sets the step size for the center frequency to 10 of the resolution bandwidth Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 81 R amp S FSV K73 Configuration of 3GPP FDD UE Measurements a a a M MMM Ml RF Measurements This is the default setting Remote command FREQ CENT STEP LINK RBW see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK on page 179 FREQ CENT STEP LINK FACT 10PCT see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK F
8. RBW VBW Noise 10 Coupling Ratio Sets the following coupling ratio video bandwidth resolution bandwidth 10 At this coupling ratio noise and pulsed signals are suppressed in the video domain For noise signals the average value is displayed This setting takes effect if you define the video bandwidth automatically Video BW Auto Remote command BAND VID RAT 0 1 see SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo RATio on page 178 RBW VBW Manual Coupling Ratio Activates the manual input of the coupling ratio The resolution bandwidth video bandwidth ratio can be set in the range 0 001 to 1000 This setting takes effect if you define the video bandwidth automatically Video BW Auto Remote command BAND VID RAT 10 see SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo RATio on page 178 Span RBW Auto 100 Coupling Ratio Sets the following coupling ratio resolution bandwidth span 100 This coupling ratio is the default setting of the R amp S FSV This setting takes effect if you define the resolution bandwidth automatically Res BW Auto Remote command BAND VID RAT 0 001 See SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo RATio on page 178 Span RBW Manual Coupling Ratio Activates the manual input of the coupling ratio This setting takes effect if you define the resolution bandwidth automatically Res BW Auto The span resolution bandwidth ratio can be set in the range 1 to 10000 Remote command BAND RAT
9. Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC MARK2 MIN Positions marker 2 to the minimum value of the trace CALC MARK2 MIN RIGH Positions marker 2 to the next higher minimum value to the right of the current value Usage Event Manual operation See Next Min Mode on page 71 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt POWer RESult PHZ lt State gt This command switches the query response of the power measurement results in the indicated measurement window between output of absolute values OFF and output referred to the measurement bandwidth ON The measurement results are output with CALC MARK FUNC POW RES Parameters lt State gt ON Results output referred to measurement bandwidth RST OFF OFF Results output in absolute values Example CALC MARK FUNC POW RES PHZ ON Mode WCDMA CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe lt State gt This command turns markers on and off If the corresponding marker number is currently active as a deltamarker it is turned into a normal marker Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt depends on mode Selects the marker Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 120 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 El CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Example CALC MARK3 ON Switches on marker 3 or switches to marker mode Manual
10. lt State gt ON OFF RST ON for TRACe1 OFF for TRACe2 to 6 Example DISP TRAC3 ON Manual operation See Blank on page 30 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe lt Range gt This command defines the display range of the y axis with logarithmic scaling The command works only for a logarithmic scaling You can select the scaling with DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 199 Suffix lt n gt window For applications that do not have more than 1 measure ment window the suffix lt n gt is irrelevant lt t gt irrelevant Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 196 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 Parameters lt Range gt Example Manual operation Other Commands Referenced in this Manual Range 10 to 200 RST 100 Default unit dB DISP TRAC Y 110dB See Range on page 85 See Range Log 100 dB on page 86 See Range Log 50 dB on page 86 See Range Log 10 dB on page 86 See Range Log 5 dB on page 86 See Range Log 1 dB on page 87 See Range Log Manual on page 87 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MODE lt Mode gt This command selects the type of scaling of the y axis When SYSTem DISPlay UPDate is turned off this command has no immediate effect on the screen Suffix lt n gt lt t gt Parameters lt Mode gt Example Manual operation window For applications that do not have more th
11. lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 130 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Example CALC DELT FUNC PNO AUTO ON Activates an automatic peak search for the reference marker in a phase noise measurement CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion PNOise STATe lt State gt This command turns the phase noise measurement at the delta marker position on and off The correction values for the bandwidth and the log amplifier are taken into account in the measurement The reference marker for phase noise measurements is either a normal marker or a fixed reference If necessary the command turns on the reference marker A fixed reference point can be modified with the CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FIXed RPOint X and CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FIXed RPOint Y commands independent of the position of marker 1 and of a trace Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt irrelevant Note marker 2 is always the deltamarker for phase noise mea surement results Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT FUNC PNO ON Switches on the phase noise measurement with all delta markers CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO X 128 MHZ Sets the frequency reference to 128 MHz C
12. For details see the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 description of the base unit Parameters lt SampleRate gt Range 1 Hz to 10 GHz RST 32 MHz Example INP DIQ SRAT 200 MHz Mode A IQ NF TDS VSA CDMA EVDO WCDMA ADEMOD GSM OFDM OFDMA WiBro WLAN Manual operation See Signal Source on page 73 See Input Sample Rate on page 74 Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 204 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 REENEN Other Commands Referenced in this Manual INPut DIQ SRATe AUTO lt State gt If enabled the sample rate of the digital baseband IQ input signal is set automatically by the connected device if the currently used sample rate is provided indicated by the lt SampleRateType gt parameter in the result of the INPut DIO CDEVice command This command is only available if the optional R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 is installed For details see the R amp S Digital UO Interface B17 description of the base unit Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example INP DIQ SRAT AUTO ON Mode IQ VSA EVDO CDMA WCDMA GSM ADEMOD TDS INPut EATT lt Attenuation gt This command defines the electronic attenuation If necessary the command also turns the electronic attenuator on This command is only available with option R amp S FSV B25 but not if R amp S FSV B17 is active The attenuation can be varied in 1 dB steps from 0 to 25
13. The following commands are identical to those in the base unit and are included in this manual only because they are specifically referenced to here See also chapter 8 5 3 Other SENSe Commands Referenced in this Manual on page 173 and chapter 8 2 6 Other CALCulate Commands Referenced in this Man ual on page 128 881 _DISPlay SUDSYSIOM errima r EENE 195 BS INFuteubeuetem Zeie NAE AAAA EASAN AEA A ATAA 200 E TIRIGGEr SUDSYSIOM aeiia a AERA EAEE EA ESAE ENEA AAEN 207 8 8 4 Other Referenced CommandS esssssesesssrrrsssesernrnnnassennnansenennnnnaatnannnaaaaetennnaaannannnaaae 210 8 8 1 DISPlay Subsystem DISPlay WINDow lt n gt STATe lt State gt Activates deactivates the window specified by the suffix lt n gt The other measurements are not aborted but continue running in the background Suffix lt n gt window Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example DISP WIND3 STAT ON Turns on a third measurement screen Mode CDMA EVDO TDS WCDMA DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE lt Mode gt This command defines the type of display and the evaluation of the traces WRITE cor responds to the Clr Write mode of manual operation The trace is switched off BLANK in manual operation with DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe The number of measurements for AVERage MAXHold and MINHold is defined with the SENSe AVERage lt n gt COUNt or SENSe SWEep COUNt commands It shou
14. a SS SS SS SS SS a a a a se SENSe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 SENSe JADJust CONFigure LEVel DURation lt Duration gt This command defines the duration of the level measurement used to determine the optimal reference level automatically for SENS ADJ LEV ON Parameters lt Duration gt lt numeric value gt in seconds Range 0 001 to 16000 0 RST 0 001 Default unit s Example ADJ CONF LEV DUR 5 Manual operation See Settings on page 72 See Meas Time Manual on page 72 SENSe JADJust LEVel This command automatically sets the optimal reference level for the current measure ment You can define a threshold that the signal must exceed before the reference level is adjusted see SENSe ADJust CONFiguration HYSTeresis UPPer and SENSe ADJust CONFiguration HYSTeresis LOWer Example ADJ LEV Manual operation See Frontend Settings on page 40 See Adjust Ref Lvl on page 41 See Auto Level on page 72 SENSe JAVERage lt n gt COUNt lt NoMeasurements gt This command defines the number of measurements which contribute to the average value Note that continuous averaging is performed after the indicated number has been reached in continuous sweep mode In single sweep mode the sweep is stopped as soon as the indicated number of meas urements Sweeps is reached Synchronization to the end of the indicated number of measurements is only possible in single sweep mode This comma
15. Example CONF WCDP CTAB NAME MEN TAB Mode WCDMA CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle SELect lt FileName gt This command selects a predefined channel table file Before using this command the RECENT channel table must be switched on first with the command CONF WCDP CTAB STAT ON Parameters lt FileName gt RST RECENT Example CONF WCDP CTAB1 ON CONF WCDP CTAB SEL CTAB 1 Mode WCDMA Manual operation See Channel Detection Settings on page 44 See Channel Search Mode on page 45 CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle DATA lt TableValues gt This command defines the values of the selected channel table Each line of the table consists of 6 values Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 155 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 CONFigure WCDPower subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Parameters lt TableValues gt Code Class Number of active channels Pilot length CDP rel 1 CDP rel 2 CDP rel 3 CDP rel 4 CDP rel 5 CDP rel 6 Code Class Code class of channel 1 l mapped Number of active channels 1to7 Pilot length Pilot length of channel DPCCH CDP rel 1 measured value of channel 1 only when queried CDP rel 2 measured value of channel 2 only when queried CDP rel 3 measured value of channel 3 only when queried CDP rel 4 measured value of channel 4 only when queried CDP rel 5 measured value of channel 5 only when queried CDP rel 6 measured value of channel 6 only when que
16. FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 De SENSe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet MCACpower This command adjusts the frequency span the measurement bandwidths and the detec tor as required for the number of channels the channel bandwidths and the channel spacings selected in the active power measurement If necessary adjacent channel power measurement is switched on prior to the adjustment To obtain valid results a complete sweep with synchronization to the end of the sweep must be performed after the adjustment Synchronization is possible only in the single sweep mode Example POW ACH PRES MCAC Mode WCDMA SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing ACHannel lt Spacing gt This command defines the spacing between the carrier signal and the adjacent channel ADJ The modification of the adjacent channel spacing ADJ causes a change in all higher adjacent channel spacings ALT1 ALT2 they are all multiplied by the same factor new spacing value old spacing value Parameters lt Spacing gt 100 Hz to 20 GHz RST 14 kHz Example POW ACH SPAC 33kHz Sets the spacing between the carrier signal and the adjacent channel to 33 kHz the alternate adjacent channel 1 to 66 kHz the alternate adjacent channel 2 to 99 kHz and so on SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing ALTernate lt channel gt lt Spacing gt This command defines the spacing between the alternate adjacent channels and the TX
17. Further Information Shorn List Of ele te EE 26 Channels of the Code Domain Channel Table and Their Usage 27 Detector OVIE W 2 deeteukundeeeekk dee ei in KC ENEE EE KEEN EE 28 Trace Mode OVERVICW A sit cecdecsn sanddcdagss tadadceeti es A ts aandar cos A 29 Selecting the Appropriate Filter Type 30 List of Available RRC and Channel Eilters 31 ASCII File Export Format wivsisssacivacsd ntaaceceasnavacdenecesssavadeliae iaa a ada a a Ai 33 Short List of Abbreviations Term or abbreviation Description UE user equipment CPICH common pilot channel DPCH dedicated physical channel data channel FDD frequency division duplexing PCCPCH primary common control physical channel Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 26 R amp S FSV K73 Instrument Functions 3GPP User Equipment Measurements Further Information Term or abbreviation PICH Description paging indication channel SCH synchronization channel divided into P SCH primary synchronization channel and S SCH secondary synchronization channel 6 3 2 Channels of the Code Domain Channel Table and Their Usage The channel assignment table contains the following data channels Channel Description DPCCH The Dedicated Physical Control Channel is used to synchronize the signal It car ries pilot symbols and is expected in the Q branch at code class 8 with code number 0 The channel is displayed in the upper part of
18. POINt COMMA RST factory setting is POINt RST does not affect set ting FORM DEXP DSEP POIN Sets the decimal point as separator DIAGnostic lt n gt SERVice NSOurce lt State gt This command switches the 28 V supply of the noise source on the front panel on or off Suffix lt n gt Parameters lt State gt Example Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 irrelevant ON OFF RST OFF DIAG SERV NSO ON 210 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 REESEN Other Commands Referenced in this Manual Manual operation See Noise Source on page 73 INITiate lt n gt CONMeas This command restarts a measurement that has been stopped in single sweep mode The measurement is restarted at the first sweep point As opposed to INI Tiate lt n gt IMMediate this command does not reset traces in maxhold minhold or average mode Therefore it can be used to continue measurements using max hold or averaging functions In single sweep mode you can synchronize to the end of the measurement with OPC OPC or WAI In continuous sweep mode synchronization to the end of the measure ment is not possible Thus it is not recommended that you use continuous sweep mode in remote control as results like trace data or markers are only valid after a single sweep end synchronization Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode DISP WIND
19. RLEVel on page 198 Range Opens a submenu to define the display range of the level axis This softkey and its submenu are available for RF measurements Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 85 R amp S FSV K73 Configuration of 3GPP FDD UE Measurements REENERT RF Measurements Range Log 100 dB Range Sets the level display range to 100 dB Remote command Logarithmic scaling DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC LOG see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 199 Display range DISP WIND TRAC Y 100DB see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 196 Range Log 50 dB Range Sets the level display range to 50 dB Remote command Logarithmic scaling DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC LOG see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 199 Display range DISP WIND TRAC Y 50DB see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 196 Range Log 10 dB Range Sets the level display range to 10 dB Remote command Logarithmic scaling DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC LOG see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 199 Display range DISP WIND TRAC Y 10DB see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 196 Range Log 5 dB Range Sets the level display range to 5 dB Remote command Logarithmic scaling DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC LOG see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 199 Display range
20. STATe on page 120 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe on page 134 Marker Zoom Activates or deactivates the zoom for the current active marker With the zoom function more details of the measurement signal can be seen This softkey can only be selected if at least one of the markers is activated Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion ZOOM on page 128 All Marker Off Switches all markers off It also switches off all functions and displays that are associated with the markers delta markers Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF on page 117 Softkeys of the Marker To Menu MKR gt key R amp S FSV K73 The MKR gt key opens a submenu for marker functions The menu is not available for the all result displays The following softkeys are available for CDA measurements For RF measurements see the description for the base unit Select EE 69 EE ee ee 70 NOX E 70 Next Peak IMO G Yosef a cctccvtiesd dccecsuesdcses vanageicace taadadeacties iaceaetaadacdvansaadacdssseasatidvasaradandeeans 70 RS lei BEE 70 PCP Ai deg ENEE EE 70 ee dE eeh Eed a 71 El e DEET 71 Next Mio MOTO iion ee 71 Select 1 2 3 4 A Selects the normal marker or the delta marker and activates the marker A stands for delta marker 1 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe on page 120 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 121 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y on page 122 Ope
21. c ceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeees 40 60 83 Full Span remote control D 181 Grid EE Grid Abs Rel remote control 0ee eee IF Output IF Video remote control rr Input 50 W 75 W remote control seiseeeeeen Last Spa M aciri airn sen ced E A AAEE Limit Chk On Off remote control e Limits On Off remote Control Link Mrk1 and Delta1 remote Control 131 Manual e Manual remote control c cccceeceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeees 179 Marker 1 remote control 0 cceeeeseeeeeeeeeeteeeees 134 Marker 1 to 4 remote control 120 121 135 Marker 2 remote Control 0 ceeeeeeeeeeseeeteeeees Marker 3 remote Control 0 ceeeeeeeeeeeeeetteeeees Marker 4 remote control jie Marker Norm Delta 00 0 0 eee cee eeeeeeteneeeeeeeeeeee Marker Norm Delta remote control 0eee 134 Marker to Trace remote control S sai Marker ZOOM isinisisi eindanna di iniii naiai Meas Start Stop remote control 00 eee 212 Meas Time Auto Meas Time Manual assososensnnnnnnneeeeeneerernnrnnnn e MiM ege eeben E e e EA EIEE Min remote control geg zx lg E e EE IEN d GE Next Min remote control Next Min Mode lt abs gt ccccccccccececeeeeeeeeeeseaaneeees WIEN i TEE Next Peak remote control 117 118 120 132 133 134 Next Peak Mode sisseedccidieiviceeincuincct aiid Noise Correction INGISG SOURCE EE Noise Src On Off remote control seses 2
22. necessary to start a new measurement in order to change the result diagram Common settings for these measurements are performed via the settings menu HOME key For details refer to the Settings Overview on page 39 dialog box RF measurements The RF Measurement option provides the following test measurement types and result displays e Output Power see chapter 7 2 1 Output Power Measurements on page 77 e Adjacent Channel Power ACLR see chapter 7 2 3 Adjacent Channel Power ACLR on page 78 Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 25 R amp S FSV K73 Instrument Functions 3GPP User Equipment Measurements 6 3 6 3 1 6 3 2 6 3 3 6 3 4 6 3 5 6 3 6 6 3 7 6 3 1 Further Information e Spectrum Emission Mask see chapter 7 2 2 Spectrum Emission Mask on page 77 e Occupied Bandwidth see chapter 7 2 4 Occupied Bandwidth on page 79 e CCDF see chapter 7 2 5 CCDF on page 79 All these measurements are accessed via the MEAS key measurement menu Some parameters are set automatically according to the 3GPP standard A list of these param eters is given with each measurement type A set of parameters is passed on from the 3GPP user equipment measurements option to the base unit and vice versa in order to provide a quick swap see the following table Transferred parameters center frequency reference level attenuation reference level offset trigger source
23. 16000 s absolute min sweep time value zero span 1 us span gt 0 depends on device model refer to data sheet Allowed values depend on the ratio of span to RBW and RBW to VBW For details refer to the data sheet Numeric input is always rounded to the nearest possible sweep time For rotary knob or UPARROW DNARROW key inputs the sweep time is adjusted in steps either down wards or upwards The manual input mode of the sweep time is indicated by a green bullet next to the SWT display in the channel bar If the selected sweep time is too short for the selected band width and span level measurement errors will occur due to a too short settling time for the resolution or video filters In this case the R amp S FSV displays the error message UNCAL and marks the indicated sweep time with a red bullet This softkey is available for RF measurements but not for CCDF measurements Remote command SWE TIME AUTO OFF see SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO on page 183 SENSe SWEep TIME on page 182 Full Span Sets the span to the full frequency range of the R amp S FSV specified in the data sheet This setting is useful for overview measurements Remote command SENSe FREQuency SPAN FULL on page 181 Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 84 R amp S FSV K73 Configuration of 3GPP FDD UE Measurements 7 2 6 3 RF Measurements Last Span Sets the span to the previous value With this f
24. DISP WIND TRAC Y 5DB see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 196 Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 86 R amp S FSV K73 Configuration of 3GPP FDD UE Measurements a SS SSE a a es RF Measurements Range Log 1 dB Range Sets the level display range to 1 dB Remote command Logarithmic scaling DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC LOG see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 199 Display range DISP WIND TRAC Y 1DB see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 196 Range Log Manual Range Opens an edit dialog box to define the display range of a logarithmic level axis manually Remote command Logarithmic scaling DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC LOG see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 199 Display range DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 196 Range Linear Range Selects linear scaling for the level axis in The grid is divided into decadal sections Markers are displayed in the selected unit Unit softkey Delta markers are displayed in referenced to the voltage value at the position of marker 1 This is the default setting for linear scaling Remote command DISP TRAC Y SPAC LIN see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 199 Range Lin Unit Range Selects linear scaling in dB for the level display range i e the horizontal lines are labeled in dB Markers are di
25. HSDPamode on page 161 Channel Search Mode Channel Detection Settings Select the channel search mode Either select Predef to use predefined tables or Auto for automatic detection of the channels Remote command CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle STATe on page 154 CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle SELect on page 155 Predefined Tables Channel Detection Settings The list shows all available channel tables and marks the current active table or the table to edit Remote command CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle CATalog on page 157 New lt Channel Detection Settings Opens the New Channel Table dialog box to define new channel table settings Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 45 R amp S FSV K73 Configuration of 3GPP FDD UE Measurements Se Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 x Channel Table Settings Name Description Channel Type State ee _PCCPCH seve EE Enter Name and Description for the new channel table and define the settings in the table below Channel Type Type of channel active channels only Symbol Rate Symbol rate at which the channel is transmitted Channel Number Number of channel spreading code 0 to spreading factor 1 Mapping Component onto which the channel is mapped I or Q The entry is not editable since the standard specifies the channel assignment for each channel Pilot Bits Number of
26. If no power changes are expected the evaluation length is one slot 4096 chips Parameters lt State gt RST OFF ON Changes of power are expected Therefore an EVM mea surement interval of one slot minus 25 us 3904 chips is consid ered OFF Changes of power are not expected Therefore an EVM measurement interval of one slot 4096 chips is considered Example SENS CDP ETCH ON Mode WCDMA Manual operation See Demod Settings on page 47 See Eliminate Tail Chips on page 48 Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 160 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 Deeg SENSe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 SENSe CDPower FILTer STATe lt State gt This command selects if a root raised cosine RRC receiver filter is used or not This feature is useful if the RRC filter is implemented in the device under test DUT Parameters lt State gt ON If an unfiltered WCDMA signal is received normal case the RRC filter should be used to get a correct signal demodulation OFF If a filtered WCDMA signal is received the RRC filter should not be used to get a correct signal demodulation This is the case if the DUT filters the signal RST ON Example SENS CDP FILT STAT OFF Mode WCDMA Manual operation See IQ Capture Settings on page 41 See RRC Filter on page 42 SENSe CDPower FRAMe VALue lt Frame gt This command defines the frame to be analyzed within the captured data Range
27. OUT1 of PAR DATA 2 Settings on the R amp S SMU PRESET LEVEL 0 dBm FREQ 2 1175 GHz DIGITAL STD LINK DIRECTION UP REVERSE TEST MODELS NOT STANDARDIZED C D960K SELECT BS MS MS 1 ON OVERALL SYMBOL RATE 6 960 STATE ON CT Op OD Oo D xe xe we Dr e e Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 17 R amp S FSV K73 Measurement Examples R amp S FSV K73 BEER Measurement 6 Measurement of Peak Code Domain Error 3 Settings on the R amp S FSV PRESET CENTER 2 1175 GHz REF 10 dBm 3GPP FDD UE TRIG EXTERN RESULTS COMPOSITE EVM 4 Measurement on the R amp S FSV The following is displayed e Screen A Code domain power of signal branch Q e Screen B Composite EVM EVM for total signal 3 6 Measurement 6 Measurement of Peak Code Domain Error The peak code domain error measurement is defined in the 3GPP specification for FDD signals An ideal reference signal is generated from the demodulated data The test signal and the reference signal are compared with each other The difference of the two signals is projected onto the classes of the different spreading factors The peak code domain error measurement is obtained by summing up the symbols of each difference signal slot and searching for the maximum error code 1 Test setup a Connect the RF output of the R amp S SMU to the input of the R amp S FSV b Connect the reference input EXT REF IN OUT on the rear panel of the
28. R amp S FSV K73 Index A Commands RI lee NEE 104 abbreviations Composite EVM niisiis tee adcieecteeseeendids 56 216 eege 26 Continuous Sweep sssssssssesssersrersessrrrrerrsnnnserseent 64 98 adjacent channel leakage ratio 0 eee eerren 78 Correction Amplitude inherent TEE 90 TEE 85 coupling amplitude power distribution 0 0 0 ee eee eeeeeeeeee 79 Gefauilt Settings 2 cicudects ees dEA gue des 97 amplitude probability distribution function 0 ee 79 Coupling Analysis Mode cccceceeeseeeeeeeeeneeentees Resolution bandwidth ccceeceeceeeeseeteeeeeeeeaee 92 ASCII Trace export SWECPAIME EEN 94 99 attenuation Video bandwidth wicca iceisctecsseteerteseeetancersenctedbedsentvowease 93 Option EE 63 89 Attenuation D option B25 62 89 Automatic 62 89 demodulation settings 20 0 eee cee eee eeeeeteaeeeee 47 Manual cccceseesesseseseeceeeeesseensenseeeeeneeeens 62 88 200 descrambling Option B25 oo cccccccccccesssesssesescesssesesescssenenseceseneees 62 88 SERIES eege ee Ee hee A4 Auto level detector Hysteresis ccecccsccscscssesescesesscocssesestesescsteseseseeneees 72 73 RUE 28 Auto Peak detector cccccccscscecscsessesesesesesesesesessseseseees 28 DiglConf Average detector N Softkey EA LATE AA T E E O A E 76 average power of inactive channels 0ccccceeeeeeees 56 Digital IQ data Average trace mode o c cscscccscscscsssecsssesestststeeseseseees 30 67 dEV C
29. R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 If the power measurementin Zero span is active this command limits the evaluation range on the trace Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt marker Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK X SLIM ON Switches on search limitation CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMits ZOOM lt State gt This command sets the limits of the marker search range to the zoom area Note The function is only available if the search limit for marker and delta marker is switched on see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMits STATe Suffix lt n gt irrelevant lt m gt irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK X SLIM Z00M ON Switches the search limit function on CALC MARK X SLIM RIGH 20MHz Sets the right limit of the search range to 20 MHz CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y This command queries the measured value of a marker The corresponding marker is activated before or switched to marker mode if necessary To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Return values lt Result gt The measured value of the
30. SENSe POWerACHannel TT 169 SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence AUTO ONCE 169 SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence TXCHannel AUTO c eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaneaaeeneneees 169 SENSe POWer ACHannel TXCHannel COUNL c ecesesesceaeceseeeeaeaeeeeeeseseeaaeceneneaeeeeeees 170 SENSE POWE TRACO EE 170 SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet MCACpower 171 SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing ACHannel nn neosoresrsnnenerenorernsnnnnene 171 IGENGe JPOWer ACHannel GbACingAlTemate channelz 171 ISGENGe JPOWer ACHannel GbACngCHAhNnel channelz 172 PENSE POW HSP OSU cnc cpa sas cct ye cees asians radiaan kan sea duas oe sapeesdnasovadaeidseievestiaepeiatae 172 Ee e leren E MEET 172 SENSe POWer ACHannel ACPairs lt ChannelPairs gt This command sets the number of adjacent channels upper and lower channel in pairs The figure 0 stands for pure channel power measurement Parameters lt ChannelPairs gt 0 to 12 RST 1 Example POW ACH ACP 3 Sets the number of adjacent channels to 3 i e the adjacent chan nel and alternate adjacent channels 1 and 2 are switched on SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth CHANnel lt channel gt lt Bandwidth gt This command sets the channel bandwidth of the specified TX channel in the radio com munication system The bandwidths of adjacent channels are not influenced by this mod ification With SENSe lt source gt POWer HSPeed set to ON steep edged channel filters are available For further in
31. Suffix lt n gt lt m gt Example Usage Manual operation Selects the measurement window Selects the marker CALC MARK2 MIN Positions marker 2 to the minimum value of the trace CALC MARK2 MIN NEXT Positions marker 2 to the next higher maximum value Event See Next Min on page 71 See Next Min Mode on page 71 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum PEAK This command positions the marker on the current trace minimum The corresponding marker is activated first or switched to marker mode if necessary If no minimum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excur sion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt lt m gt Example Usage Manual operation Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 Selects the measurement window depends on mode Selects the marker CALC MARK2 MIN Positions marker 2 to the minimum value of the trace Event See Min on page 71 119 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum RIGHt This command positions a marker to the next higher trace minimum on the right of the current value i e in ascending X direction If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced
32. Usage Query only Manual operation See Marker 1 2 3 4 on page 68 8 2 6 2 CALCulate LIMit subsystem CAL Culate nzLlMitksACBowerACHannel AbGolute neeo r rr toerrn renerne rennene 136 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel ABSolute STAT ccccceceeceeteeeeeeeeeeaeaeaeeees 137 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel REI ativel eeen enenereeerorersrsrnrnenennn 138 CAL Culate nzLlMitcks ACbowerACHannelREGu 138 CAL Culate nzLlMitcks AChbower ACHannelt REI ativelSTATe eerren 139 CAL Culate nzLlMitcks AChbower Al Temate Channel AbBGolute eneren 140 CAL Culate nzLlMitcks ACbower Al Temate channelzfREL ativel 141 CAL Culate nzLlMitcks AChbower Al Temate Channel tREL ativelSTAaTe 141 CAL Culate nzLlMitcks ACbowert GTATel 142 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt FAIL 00 arni reunaa iakeas eniak eeii 142 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel ABSolute lt LowerLimit gt lt UpperLimit gt This command defines the absolute limit value for the lower upper adjacent channel dur ing adjacent channel power measurement Adjacent Channel Power Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 136 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 El CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Note that the absolute limit value has no effect on the limit check as soon as it is below the relative limit value defined with CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel RELative This mechanism allows
33. ccecceeeeteeeereees 182 Sweeptime Auto 00 ecceecceee cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeetes Sweeptime Manual 7 Sweeptime Manual remote control eee 182 SWEEP AE Trace Mode remote control Trg Gate Source remote Control 207 209 Trigger Offset cornissa aiara 43 66 Trigger Out S Video BW Auto ie sacs nerds 93 Video BW Manual cece ce eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeees 92 KEE 30 67 Softkeys Lower Level Hysteresis AAA 73 Upper Level Hysteresis trig Ze Span MON i scecsieens cepsiehetneeseetdiereceivasuieleaandlnaad 83 Special characters cccccceceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeennnnneeeees 105 split screen dog DD GE UE EE 83 Status lt CISPlAY eege gehier BEER ENNS 58 Step size Center frequency sisirin 81 Stop TEQUONGCY EE 83 supply voltage external noise source usses 73 101 sweep COUN eis ceceiseecosneasesaescesseess cuvsendasiaseacuoses casceeascet e 65 100 Sweep Continue single Sweep eeseeeserreesrrrrereree 64 98 r le CN 64 98 Single ey MME esrin irn i aar r a Sweep IMONU EE 97 Sweep time ele 94 99 Symbol EE 56 57 symbol rate SYNC Search SettingS eceeeeeeeeceeee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 44 T ST Gata ees 58 MIM SONS EE 56 T Offs wa 58 total DOW EE 56 Trace Clear Write siseste n ae uence 29 66 Trace mode AVCTAQGS crrr eeaeee SE eE aAa EE EEAS 30 67 Blank Clear Write Max ee WEE Min Hold VIEW arnaga a e a ae trigger G
34. channel ALT1 ALT2 A modification of a higher adjacent channel spacing causes a change by the same factor new spacing value old spacing value in all higher adjacent channel spacings while the lower adjacent channel spacings remain unchanged Suffix lt channel gt 1 11 the alternate adjacent channel Parameters lt Spacing gt 100 Hz to 20 GHz RST 40 kHz ALT1 60 kHz ALT2 80 kHz ALT3 Example POW ACH SPAC ALT1 100 kHz Sets the spacing between TX channel and alternate adjacent channel 1 ALT1 from 40 kHz to 100 kHz In consequence the spacing between the TX channel and all higher alternate adjacent channels is increased by the factor 100 40 2 5 ALT2 150 kHz ALT3 200 kHz ALT4 250 kHz Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 171 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 Deeg SENSe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing CHANnel lt channel gt lt Spacing gt This command defines the channel spacing for the carrier signals Suffix lt channel gt 1 11 the TX channel Parameters lt Spacing gt 14 kHz to 20 GHz RST 20 kHz Example POW ACH SPAC CHAN 25kHz SENSe POWer HSPeed lt State gt This command switches on or off the high speed channel adjacent channel power mea surement The measurement itself is performed in zero span on the center frequencies of the individual channels The command automatically switches to zero span and back Dep
35. irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC STAT CCDF ON Switches on the CCDF measurement CALCulate lt n gt STATistics NSAMples lt NoMeasPoints gt This command sets the number of measurement points to be acquired for the statistical measurement functions Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 149 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 Parameters lt NoMeasPoints gt Example CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 100 to 1E9 RST 100000 CALC STAT NSAM 500 Sets the number of measurement points to be acquired to 500 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics PRESet This command resets the scaling of the X and Y axes in a statistical measurement The following values are set x axis ref level 20 dBm x axis range APD 100 dB x axis range CCDF 20 dB y axis upper limit 1 0 y axis lower limit 1E 6 Suffix lt n gt Example irrelevant CALC STAT PRES Resets the scaling for statistical functions CALCulate lt n gt STATistics RESult lt Trace gt lt ResultType gt This command reads out the results of statistical measurements of a recorded trace Suffix lt n gt lt Trace gt Parameters lt ResultType gt Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 irrelevant 1 6 trace MEAN PEAK CFACtor ALL MEAN Average RMS power in dBm measured during the measure ment time PEAK
36. lt PRBSTestState gt lt SampleRateT ype gt lt Placeholder gt Example Mode Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 Other Commands Referenced in this Manual Defines whether a device is connected or not 0 No device is connected 1 A device is connected Device ID of the connected device Serial number of the connected device Port name used by the connected device Maximum or currently used sampling rate of the connected device in Hz depends on the used connection protocol version indicated by lt SampleRateType gt parameter Maximum data transfer rate of the connected device in Hz State of the connection protocol which is used to identify the con nected device Not Started Has to be Started Started Passed Failed Done State of the PRBS test Not Started Has to be Started Started Passed Failed Done 0 Maximum sampling rate is displayed 1 Current sampling rate is displayed for future use currently 0 INP DIQ CDEV Result 1 SMU200A 103634 0ut A 70000000 100000000 Passed Not Started 0 0 IQ VSA EVDO CDMA WCDMA GSM ADEMOD TDS 202 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 BREET Other Commands Referenced in this Manual Manual operation See Signal Source on page 73 See Connected Device on page 74 See Digital IQ Info on page 74 INPut DIQ RANGe AUTO lt State gt If enabled the digita
37. on page 191 It can only be set if CODE PWR ABSOLUTE RELATIVE or CHANNEL TABLE is selected as the display mode for trace 1 Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 188 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 Return values lt Result gt Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 TRACe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 lt code class gt lt channel number gt lt absolute level gt lt relative level gt lt timing offset gt lt pilot length gt lt active flag gt lt channel type gt lt modulation type gt lt reserved gt Comma separated list with 10 values for each channel the chan nels are output in ascending order sorted by code number i e in the same sequence they are displayed on screen lt code class gt Code class of the channel 2 8 lt channel number gt Code number of the channel 0 255 lt I Q component gt IQ component of the channel 0 1 0 Q component Channel symbols Sn sent from quadrate com ponent only imaginary part of Sn is used Re Sn 0 Im Sn 0 1 component Channel symbols Sn sent from In phase com ponent only real part of Sn is used Re Sn 0 Im Sn 0 lt absolute level gt Absolute level of the code channel at the selected channel slot dBm The channel slot can be marked by the SELECTED CPICH slot lt relative level gt Relative level of the code channel at the selected channel s
38. on page 48 SENSe CDPower OVERview lt State gt This command switches to an overview display of a code domain measurement CDP rel CDP abs CDEP If enabled the branch of the code power is displayed in screen A and the Q branch in screen B Both results can be read using TRACE DATA TRACE1 and TRACE DATA TRACE2 respectively If disabled screen A displays the branch and screen B provides the result summary display Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CDP OVER OFF Mode CDMA EVDO WCDMA SENSe CDPower PDIsplay lt Mode gt This command switches between showing the absolute or relative power to the chosen reference This parameter only affects the display mode code domain power Parameters lt Mode gt ABS REL RST ABS Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 165 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 SENSe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Example SENS CDP PDIS ABS Mode WCDMA Manual operation See Demod Settings on page 47 See Code Power Displ on page 48 SENSe CDPower QINVert lt State gt This command inverts the Q component of the signal Parameters ON OFF RST OFF Example CDP QINV ON Activates inversion of Q component Mode CDMA EVDO TDS WCDMA Manual operation See IQ Capture Settings on page 41 See Invert Q on page 42 SENSe CDPower SFACtor lt SpreadingFactor gt This command defines the spreading factor
39. x Scrambling Code Settings Format Hex Dec Type O Long C Short Scrambling Code Sync Scrambling Settings Define the scrambling code in the specified format The entered scrambling code has to be identical to that of the signal Otherwise a CDP measurement of the signal is not possible Remote command SENSe CDPower LCODe VALue on page 164 Format Sync Scrambling Settings Switches the display format of the scrambling codes between hexadecimal and decimal Remote command SENS CDP LCOD DVAL lt numeric value gt see SENSe CDPower LCODe VALue on page 164 Type Sync Scrambling Settings Select whether the entered scrambling code is to be handled as long or short scrambling code Remote command SENSe CDPower LCODe TYPE on page 163 Channel Detection Settings Opens the Channel Detection Settings dialog box Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 44 R amp S FSV K73 Configuration of 36PP FDD UE Measurements Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 Channel Detection Settings 8 x Common Settings HS DPA UPA On C Off Predefined Channel Table Settings Channel Search Mode Predef Auto Predefined Tables lt none gt HS DPA UPA Channel Detection Settings If this option is selected it enables the application to detect HSUPA DPA channels and shows them in the channel table Remote command SENSe CDPower
40. 0 1 RST 1E 6 Example CALC STAT SCAL Y LOW 0 001 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe Y UNIT lt Unit gt This command defines the scaling type of the y axis Suffix lt n gt selects the screen Parameters lt Unit gt PCT ABS RST ABS Example CALC STAT SCAL Y UNIT PCT Sets the percentage scale CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe Y UPPer lt Value gt This command defines the upper limit for the y axis of the diagram in statistical meas urements Since probabilities are specified on the y axis the entered numeric values are dimensionless Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt Value gt 1E 8 to 1 0 RST 1 0 Example CALC STAT SCAL Y UPP 0 01 Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 152 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 8 2 6 6 8 3 CONFigure WCDPower subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Other Referenced CALCulate Commands GAL Gulatesne UNIT e Cl eaaa aaa aaa a a casa adieu iaaa E a E EO aa 153 CALCulate lt n gt UNIT POWer lt Unit gt This command selects the unit of the y axis The unit applies to all measurement windows Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt Unit gt DBM V A W DBPW WATT DBUV DBMV VOLT DBUA AMPere RST dBm Example CALC UNIT POW DBM Sets the power unit to dBm Manual operation See Unit on page 87 CONFigure WCDPower subsystem R amp S FSV K73 This subsystem comprises the commands for configuring the code do
41. 0 1 see SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution RATio on page 177 Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 96 R amp S FSV K73 Configuration of 3GPP FDD UE Measurements 7 2 6 5 RF Measurements Default Coupling Coupling Ratio Sets all coupled functions to the default state AUTO In addition the ratio RBW VBW is set to SINE 1 1 and the ratio SPAN RBW to 100 Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution AUTO on page 176 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo AUTO on page 178 SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO on page 183 Filter Type Opens a submenu to select the filter type This softkey and its submenu are available for measuring the the Spectrum Emission Mask the Occupied Bandwidth and the CCDF Instead of opening a submenu this soft key opens the Sweep List dialog box to select the filter type when measuring the Spec trum Emission Mask The submenu contains the following softkeys e Normal 3 dB e CISPR 6 dB e MIL Std 6 dB Note that the 6 dB bandwidths are available only with option R amp S FSV K54 e Channel e RRC e 5 Pole not available for sweep type FFT For detailed information on filters see chapter 6 3 5 Selecting the Appropriate Filter Type on page 30 and chapter 6 3 6 List of Available RRC and Channel Filters on page 31 Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution TYPE on page 177 Softkeys of the Sweep Menu The followi
42. 178 Sweeptime Manual Opens an edit dialog box to enter the sweep time Sweep time absolute max sweep time value 16000 s absolute min sweep time value zero span 1 us span gt 0 depends on device model refer to data sheet Allowed values depend on the ratio of span to RBW and RBW to VBW For details refer to the data sheet Numeric input is always rounded to the nearest possible sweep time For rotary knob or UPARROW DNARROW key inputs the sweep time is adjusted in steps either down wards or upwards The manual input mode of the sweep time is indicated by a green bullet next to the SWT display in the channel bar If the selected sweep time is too short for the selected band width and span level measurement errors will occur due to a too short settling time for the resolution or video filters In this case the R amp S FSV displays the error message UNCAL and marks the indicated sweep time with a red bullet Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 93 R amp S FSV K73 Configuration of 3GPP FDD UE Measurements REENERT RF Measurements This softkey is available for RF measurements but not for CCDF measurements Remote command SWE TIME AUTO OFF see SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO on page 183 SENSe SWEep TIME on page 182 Sweeptime Auto Couples the sweep time to the span video bandwidth VBW and resolution bandwidth RBW not available for zero span If you change
43. 2 measured value of channel 2 only when queried ECDP rel 3 measured value of channel 3 only when queried ECDP rel 4 measured value of channel 4 only when queried Example CONF WCDP MS CTAB EDAT Mode WCDMA CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle EDATa EDPCc This command activates ON or deactivates OFF the E DPCCH entry in a predefined channel table Parameters RST OFF Example CONF WCDP MS CTAB EDAT EDPC ON Mode WCDMA 8 4 INSTrument subsystem The INSTrument subsystem selects the operating mode of the unit either via text param eters or fixed numbers le Ka Det SE EEN 158 INS mumo Eege eege ed 158 INSTrument SELect lt Mode gt This command switches between the measurement modes by means of text parameters Parameters lt Mode gt MWCD 3G FDD UE Mode R amp S FSV K73 option INSTrument NSELect lt Mode gt This command switches between the measurement modes by means of numbers Parameters lt Mode gt 9 3G FDD UE Mode R amp S FSV K73 option Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 158 R amp S FSV K73 8 5 8 5 1 8 5 2 8 5 3 8 5 1 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 SENSe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 SENSe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 The SENSe subsystem controls the essential parameters of the analyzer In accordance with the SCPI standard the keyword SENSe is optional which means that it is not nec essary to include the SENSe node in command sequence
44. CDEPower Result display of code domain error power as bar graph XPOW CDP Result display of code domain power as bar graph absolute scal ing XPOW CDP ABSolute Result display of code domain power as bar graph absolute scal ing XTIM CDP BSTReam Result display of bit stream XTIMe CDP CHIP EVM Result display error vector magnitude EVM versus chip XTIMe CDP CHIP MAGNitude Result display magnitude error versus chip XTIMe CDPower CHIP PHASe Result display phase error versus chip XTIM CDP COMP CONStellation Result display of composite constellation XTIM CDP ERR CTABle Result display of channel assignment table XTIM CDP ERR PCDomain Result display of peak code domain error XTIM CDP ERR SUMMary Result display in tabular form XTIM CDP FVSLot Result display of frequency error versus slot XTIM CDP MACCuracy Result display of composite EVM error vector magnitude refer enced to the overall signal XPOW CDP OVERview Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 109 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Result display of code domain power ratio as bar graph relative scaling XTIM CDP PSVS Result display of phase discontinuity versus slot XTIM CDP PVSLot Result display of power versus slot XTIM CDP PVSLot ABSolute Result display of power versus slot absolute scaling XTIM CDP PVSLot RATio Result display of power versus slo
45. FEED XTIM CDP BSTR see chapter 8 2 2 CALCulate FEED subsystem on page 108 Freq Err vs Slot To reduce the overall span of Frequency Err vs Slot the difference between the fre quency error of the corresponding slot to the frequency error of the first zero slot is calculated for each value to be displayed This helps eliminate a static frequency offset of the whole signal to achieve a better display of a real time depending frequency curve Remote command CALC FEED XTIM CDP FVSL see chapter 8 2 2 CALCulate FEED subsystem on page 108 Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 59 R amp S FSV K73 Configuration of 3GPP FDD UE Measurements Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 Phase Discontinuity vs Slot The Phase Discontinuity vs Slot is calculated according to 3GPP specifications The phase calculated for each slot is interpolated to both ends of the slot using the frequency shift of that slot The difference between the phase interpolated for the beginning of one slot and the end of the preceding slot is displayed as the phase discontinuity of that slot Remote command CALC FEED XTIM CDP PSVS see chapter 8 2 2 CALCulate FEED subsystem on page 108 Softkeys of the Frequency Menu FREQ key R amp S FSV K73 The FREQ key opens a submenu to change the measurement frequency Some softkey functions are not available in CDP mode Refer to the description of the FREQ key in
46. K104 EUTRA LTE Downlink Measurement Application e R amp S FSV K101 K105 EUTRA LTE Uplink Measurement Application These manuals are available in PDF format on the CD delivered with the instrument The printed manual can be ordered from Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG Service Manual This manual is available in PDF format on the CD delivered with the instrument It describes how to check compliance with rated specifications instrument function repair troubleshooting and fault elimination It contains all information required for repairing the R amp S FSV by replacing modules The manual includes the following chapters Chapter 1 Performance Test Chapter 2 Adjustment Chapter 3 Repair Chapter 4 Software Update Installing Options Chapter 5 Documents Online Help The online help contains context specific help on operating the R amp S FSV and all available options It describes both manual and remote operation The online help is installed on Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 6 R amp S FSV K73 Preface 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 2 Conventions Used in the Documentation the R amp S FSV by default and is also available as an executable chm file on the CD delivered with the instrument Release Notes The release notes describe the installation of the firmware new and modified functions eliminated problems and last minute changes to the documentation The corresponding firmware version is indicated
47. MAX RIGH Sets delta marker 1 to the next smaller maximum value to the right of the current value Manual operation See Next Peak Mode on page 70 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum LEFT This command positions the delta marker to the next higher trace minimum on the left of the current value i e descending X values The corresponding delta marker is activated first if necessary If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC DELT MIN LEFT Sets delta marker 1 to the next higher minimum to the left of the current value Manual operation See Next Min Mode on page 71 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum NEXT This command positions the delta marker to the next higher trace minimum The corre sponding delta marker is activated first if necessary If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC DELT2 MIN NEXT Sets delta marker 2 to the next higher minimum value Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 133 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K
48. MODE WRIT see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 195 Max Hold The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and displayed The R amp S FSV saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is greater than the previous one The detector is automatically set to Positive Peak This mode is especially useful with modulated or pulsed signals The signal spectrum is filled up upon each sweep until all signal components are detected in a kind of envelope This mode is not available for statistics measurements Remote command DISP TRAC MODE MAXH see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 195 Min Hold The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed The R amp S FSV saves the smallest of the previously stored currently measured values in the trace memory The detector is automatically set to Negative Peak This mode is useful e g for making an unmodulated carrier in a composite signal visible Noise interference signals or modulated signals are suppressed whereas a CW signal is recognized by its constant level This mode is not available for statistics measurements Remote command DISP TRAC MODE MINH see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 195 Average The average is formed over several sweeps The Sweep Count determines the number of averaging procedures All available detectors can be selected If the detect
49. Manual operation See RF Atten Manual Mech Att Manual on page 62 INPut ATTenuation AUTO lt State gt This command automatically couples the input attenuation to the reference level state ON or switches the input attenuation to manual entry state OFF This function is not available if the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 is active Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON Example INP ATT AUTO ON Couples the attenuation set on the attenuator to the reference level Manual operation See RF Atten Auto Mech Att Auto on page 62 INPut COUPling lt CouplingType gt Toggles the RF input of the R amp S FSV between AC and DC coupling This function is not available if the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 is active Parameters lt CouplingType gt AC DC RST AC Example INP COUP DC Manual operation See Input AC DC on page 63 INPut DIQ CDEVice This command queries the current configuration and the status of the digital baseband input from the optional R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 For details see the section Interface Status Information for the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 in the description of the base unit Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 201 R amp S FSV K73 Return values lt ConnState gt lt DeviceName gt lt SerialNumber gt lt PortName gt lt SampleRate gt lt MaxTransferRate gt lt ConnProtState gt
50. POSitive NEGative RST POSitive Example TRIG SLOP NEG Manual operation See IQ Capture Settings on page 41 See Trg Gate Polarity on page 43 See Trigger Polarity on page 65 TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SOURCce lt Source gt This command selects the trigger source For details on trigger modes refer to the Trg Gate Source softkey in the base unit description Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 209 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 Parameters lt Source gt Example Manual operation Other Commands Referenced in this Manual IMMediate Free Run EXTern External trigger IFPower Power trigger at the second intermediate frequency RF Power Power trigger at the first intermediate frequency TIME Time interval PSEN External power sensor requires R amp S FSV K9 option RST IMMediate TRIG SOUR EXT Selects the external trigger input as source of the trigger signal See IQ Capture Settings on page 41 See Trigger Source External on page 43 See Trigger Source Free Run on page 43 8 8 4 Other Referenced Commands FORMat DEXPort DSEParator lt Separator gt This command defines which decimal separator decimal point or comma is to be used for outputting measurement data to the file in ASCII format Different languages of eval uation programs e g MS Excel can thus be supported Parameters lt Separator gt Example
51. Peak power in dBm measured during the measurement time CFACtor Determined CREST factor ratio of peak power to average power in dB ALL Results of all three measurements mentioned before separated by commas lt mean power gt lt peak power gt lt crest factor gt The required result is selected via the following parameters 150 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Example CALC STAT RES2 ALL Reads out the three measurement results of trace 2 Example of answer string 5 56 19 25 13 69 i e mean power 5 56 dBm peak power 19 25 dBm CREST factor 13 69 dB CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe AUTO ONCE This command optimizes the level setting of the instrument depending on the measured peak power in order to obtain maximum instrument sensitivity To obtain maximum resolution the level range is set as a function of the measured spac ing between peak power and the minimum power for the APD measurement and of the spacing between peak power and mean power for the CCDF measurement In addition the probability scale for the number of test points is adapted Subsequent commands have to be synchronized with WAI OPC or OPC to the end of the auto range process which would otherwise be aborted Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Example CALC STAT SCAL AUTO ONCE WAI Adapts the level setting for statistical measurements CALCulate lt n gt STATisti
52. R amp S FSV to the reference input REF on the rear panel of the R amp S SMU coaxial cable with BNC connectors c Connect the external trigger input on the rear panel of the R amp S FSV EXT TRIG GATE to the external trigger output on the rear panel of the R amp S SMU TRIG OUT1 of PAR DATA 2 Settings on the R amp S SMU PRESET LEVEL 0 dBm FREQ 2 1175 GHz DIGITAL STD WCDMA 3GPP LINK DIRECTION UP REVERSE TEST MODELS NOT STANDARDIZED C D960K SELECT BS MS Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 18 Measurement 6 Measurement of Peak Code Domain Error MS 1 ON OVERALL SYMBOL RATE 6 960 STATE ON 3 Settings on the R amp S FSV PRESET CENTER 2 1175 GHz REF 0 dBm 3GPP FDD UE TRIG EXTERN RESULTS PEAK CODE DOMAIN ERR 4 Measurement on the R amp S FSV The following is displayed e Screen A Code domain power of signal branch Q e Screen B Peak code domain error projection of error onto the class with spreading factor 256 R amp S FSV K73 Setup for User Equipment Tests 4 Setup for User Equipment Tests Risk of instrument damage Before switching on the instrument make sure that the following conditions are met Instrument covers are in place and all fasteners are tightened All fan openings are unobstructed and the airflow perforations are unimpeded The minimum distance from the wall is 10 cm The instrument is dry and shows no sign of condensation The instrument is
53. RST 0 1 x lt span value gt Default unit Hz FREQ CENT STEP 120 MHz See CF Stepsize on page 60 See CF Stepsize on page 81 See Manual on page 83 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO lt State gt This command couples the step size of the center frequency to the span ON or sets the value of the center frequency entered via SENSe FREQuency CENTer OFF Parameters lt State gt Example ON OFF RST ON FREQ CENT STEP AUTO ON Activates the coupling of the step size to the span SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK lt CouplingType gt This command couples and decouples the center frequency step size to the span or the resolution bandwidth Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 179 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 Parameters lt CouplingType gt Example Manual operation SENSe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 SPAN Couples the step size to the span Available for measurements in the frequency domain RBW Couples the step size to the resolution bandwidth Available for measurements in the time domain OFF Decouples the step size manual input RST SPAN FREQO CENT STEP LINK SPAN See CF Stepsize on page 81 See 0 1 Span span gt 0 on page 81 See 0 1 RBW span gt 0 on page 81 See 0 5 Span span gt 0 on page 82 See 0 5 RBW span gt 0 on page 82 See x Span span gt 0 on
54. Rm Determines the root mean square power within a measurement point Average Av Determines the linear average power within a mea surement point Sample Sa Selects the last value within a measurement point The result obtained from the selected detector within a measurement point is displayed as the power value at this measurement point All detectors work in parallel in the background which means that the measurement speed is independent of the detector combination used for different traces Number of measured values During a frequency sweep the R amp S FSV increments the first local oscillator in steps that are smaller than approximately 1 10 of the bandwidth This ensures that the oscillator step speed is conform to the hardware settling times and does not affect the precision of the measured power The number of measured values taken during a sweep is independent of the number of oscillator steps It is always selected as a multiple or a fraction of 691 default number of trace points displayed on the screen Choosing less then 691 measured values e g 125 or 251 will lead to an interpolated measurement curve choosing more than 691 points e g 1001 2001 will result in several measured values being overlaid at the same frequency position Ole Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 28 R amp S FSV K73 Instrument Functions 3GPP User Equipment Measurements a a ee 5 Further Information RMS de
55. S FSV K73 Parameters lt ResultType gt ACPower CPOWer ACPower Adjacent channel power measurement Results are output in the following sequence separated by com mas Power of transmission channel Power of lower adjacent channel Power of upper adjacent channel Power of lower alternate channel 1 Power of upper alternate channel 1 Power of lower alternate channel 2 Power of upper alternate channel 2 The number of measured values returned depends on the number of adjacent alternate channels selected with SENSe POWer ACHannel ACPairs With logarithmic scaling RANGE LOG the power is output in the currently selected level unit with linear scaling RANGE LIN dB or LIN the power is output in W If SENSe POWer ACHannel MODE is set to REL the adjacent alternate channel power is output in dB CPOWer Channel power measurement In a Spectrum Emission Mask measurement the query returns the power result for the reference range if this power reference type is selected With logarithmic scaling RANGE LOG the channel power is out put in the currently selected level unit with linear scaling RANGE LIN dB or LIN the channel power is output in W CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer SELect lt MeasType gt This command selects and switches on the specified power measurement type in the window specified by the suffix lt n gt The channel spacings and channel ba
56. Sync Search Despreading Sync Scrambling Settings on page 44 Channel Detection Channel Detection Settings on page 44 Demodulation Evaluation Demod Settings on page 47 Display Configuration chapter 7 1 1 Display Concept on page 35 Frontend Settings This softkey opens the Frontend Settings dialog box to modify the following parameters Frequency Settings Center Frequency 15 0 GHz Frequency Offset 0 0 Hz E Level Settings Ref Level 10 0 dBm Ref Level Offset 0 0 dB Preamplifier On Off Adjust Ref Level Center Frontend Settings Opens an edit dialog box to enter the center frequency The allowed range of values for the center frequency depends on the frequency span span gt 0 SPAN min 2 S foenter lt fmax S SPAN min 2 span 0 0Hzs foenter lt fmax fmax and SpanNmin are specified in the data sheet Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 178 Frequency Offset Frontend Settings Opens an edit dialog box to enter a frequency offset that shifts the displayed frequency range by the specified offset The softkey indicates the current frequency offset The allowed values range from 100 GHz to 100 GHz The default setting is 0 Hz Remote command SENSe FREQuency OFFSet on page 180 Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 40 R amp S FSV K73 Configuration of 3GPP FDD UE Measurements SSS SS ES a a ee eee Code Domain Ana
57. The spreading factor is only significant for display mode PEAK CODE DOMAIN ERROR Parameters lt SpreadingFactor gt 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 RST 256 Example CDP SFAC 256 Mode WCDMA SENSe CDPower SLOT lt numeric value gt This command selects the slot Power Control Group PCG to be analyzed Parameters lt numeric value gt Range 0 to TDS 62 CDMA capture length 1 WCDMA 14 Increment 1 RST 0 The capture length is defined via the SENSe CDPower TQLength command Example CDP SLOT 7 Selects slot number 7 for analysis Mode CDMA EVDO TDS WCDMA Manual operation See Select Channel on page 49 See Select Slot on page 50 Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 166 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 SENSe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 8 5 2 SENSe POWer Subsystem This subsystem controls the parameters for the spectral power measurements The numeric suffix in SENSe lt 1 4 gt is not significant in this subsystem SENSe POWer ACHannel ACP8irs 0 0cceceeeeceeeeeee cence cane ae eee teteeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeaaaeaeaeeteneees 167 SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth CHANnel lt channel gt 2 cecceceeeeeeeees 167 ISENGe JPOWer ACHannel BANDwidtblDWlDth ACHannel rnrn r enenene 168 ISGENGe JPOWer ACHannel BANDwidtblDWlDt Al Termate channel 168 ISENGe JPOWer ACHannel MODE cece ccceeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeaeaaeeaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeaaaeaaneneees 168
58. UO sample with the magnitude 1 The level can be defined either in dBm or Volt Remote command INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer on page 203 Level Unit Signal Source Defines the unit used for the full scale level Remote command INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer UNIT on page 204 Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level Signal Source If enabled the reference level is adjusted to the full scale level automatically if any change occurs Remote command INPut DIQ RANGe COUPling on page 203 Digital IQ Info Displays a dialog box with information on the digital UO input and output connection via the optional R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 if available The information includes e Device identification e Used port Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 74 R amp S FSV K73 Configuration of 3GPP FDD UE Measurements Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 e Maximum digital input output sample rates and maximum digital input output trans fer rates Status of the connection protocol e Status of the PRBS descewing test 4 Digital Baseband Info Digital IQ Input Connected Device SMU200A Serial Number 103634 Port Out Digital Input Sample Rate 100 MHz Max Digital Input Transfer Rate 100 MHz Connection Protocol Passed PRBS Test Descewing Passed Digital IQ Output Connected Device ExBox Serial Number 100064 Port IQ IN Max Digital Output Transfer Rate 110 MHz Connection Protocol Passed PRBS T
59. XTIM CDP PVSY see chapter 8 2 2 CALCulate FEED subsystem on page 108 Symbol Constellation The Symbol Const measurement shows QPSK or BPSK modulated signals of the selected channel and the selected slot QPSK constellation points are located on the diagonals not x and y axis of the constellation diagram BPSK constellation points are always on the x axis If possible the display should use more than just 1 pixel per value as in the minimum case only 12 symbols are available This improves the visibility Remote command CALC FEED XTIM CDP SYMB CONS see chapter 8 2 2 CALCulate FEED subsys tem on page 108 Symbol EVM The Symbol EVM display mode shows the error between the measured signal and the ideal reference signal in percent for the selected channel and the selected slot A trace over all symbols of a slot is drawn The number of symbols is in the range from 12 min to 384 max It depends on the symbol rate of the channel Remote command CALC FEED XTIM CDP SYMB EVM see chapter 8 2 2 CALCulate FEED subsys tem on page 108 Bitstream The Bitstream measurement displays the demodulated bits of a selected channel for a given slot Depending on the symbol rate the number of symbols within a slot can vary from 12 min to 384 max For QPSK modulation a symbol consists of 2 Bits I and Q For BPSK modulation a symbol consists of 1 Bit only used Remote command CALC
60. a mouse pointer in the display or a key on the instrument or on a keyboard Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 7 R amp S FSV K73 Preface EH How to Use the Help System 1 3 How to Use the Help System Calling context sensitive and general help gt To display the general help dialog box press the HELP key on the front panel The help dialog box View tab is displayed A topic containing information about the current menu or the currently opened dialog box and its function is displayed For standard Windows dialog boxes e g File Properties Print dialog etc no context sensitive help is available gt Ifthe help is already displayed press the softkey for which you want to display help A topic containing information about the softkey and its function is displayed If a softkey opens a submenu and you press the softkey a second time the submenu of the softkey is displayed Contents of the help dialog box The help dialog box contains four tabs e Contents contains a table of help contents e View contains a specific help topic e Index contains index entries to search for help topics e Zoom contains zoom functions for the help display To change between these tabs press the tab on the touchscreen Navigating in the table of contents e To move through the displayed contents entries use the UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW keys Entries that contain further entries are marked with a plus sign e Todi
61. amp S FSV K73 Deeg SENSe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Parameters lt Channel gt MINimum MAXimum LHIGhest MINimum Transmission channel with the lowest power MAXimum Transmission channel with the highest power LHIGhest Lowermost transmission channel for the lower adjacent channels uppermost transmission channel for the upper adjacent channels Example POW ACH REF TXCH AUTO MAX The transmission channel with the highest power is used as a ref erence channel SENSe POWer ACHannel TXCHannel COUNt lt Number gt This command selects the number of carrier signals The command is available only for multicarrier channel and adjacent channel power measurements with span gt 0 see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer SELect on page 125 Parameters lt Number gt 1 to 18 RST 1 Example POW ACH TXCH COUN 3 SENSe POWer TRACe lt TraceNumber gt This command assigns the channel adjacent channel power measurement to the indi cated trace The corresponding trace must be active i e its state must be different from blank Note The measurement of the occupied bandwidth OBW is performed on the trace on which marker 1 is positioned To evaluate another trace marker 1 must be positioned to another trace with CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRACe Parameters lt TraceNumber gt 1to6 Example POW TRAC 2 Assigns the measurement to trace 2 Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 170 R amp S
62. and Menus for RF Measurements KC 80 Softkeys of the Frequency Men 80 Softkeys of the Span Menu for RF Measurement eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenntaeeeeeeeeeeeeaas 83 Softkeys of the Amplitude Menu 85 Softkeys of the Bandwidth Men 91 Softkeys of the Sweep Men 97 Softkeys of the Input Output Menu for RF Measurements 101 Output Power Measurements The R amp S FSV measures the unweighted RF signal power in a bandwidth of Saw SMHz gt 1 a 3 84M Hz a 0 22 The power is measured in zero span mode time domain using a digital channel filter of 5 MHz in bandwidth According to the 3GPP standard the measurement bandwidth 5 MHz is slightly larger than the minimum required bandwidth of 4 7 MHz The bandwidth is displayed numerically below the screen Remote CONFigure WCDPower MS MEASurement on page 153 Spectrum Emission Mask The measurement Spectrum Emission Mask is the determination of the power of the 3GPP FDD UE signal in defined offsets from the carrier and compares the power values with a spectral mask specified by 3GPP This measurement ist identical to the Spectrum Emission Mask measurement of the base unit By entering the measurement the configuration to measure the 3GPP standard will be loaded The following user specific settings are not modified on the first access following preset ting e Reference Level Reference Level Offset Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 77 R amp S FSV K73 Conf
63. and operating modes for which a command can be used are indicated by the following abbreviations Abbreviation Description A spectrum analysis A F spectrum analysis span gt 0 only frequency mode A T spectrum analysis zero span only time mode ADEMOD analog demodulation option R amp S FSV K7 BT Bluetooth option R amp S FSV K8 CDMA CDMA 2000 base station measurements option R amp S FSV K82 EVDO 1xEV DO base station analysis option R amp S FSV K84 GSM GSM Edge measurements option R amp S FSV K10 IO IQ Analyzer mode OFDM WiMAX IEEE 802 16 OFDM measurements option R amp S FSV K93 OFDMA WiBro WiMAX IEEE 802 16e OFDMA WiBro measurements option R amp S FSV K93 NF Noise Figure measurements R amp S FSV K30 PHN Phase Noise measurements R amp S FSV K40 PSM Power Sensor measurements option R amp S FSV K9 SFM Stereo FM measurements optionR amp S FSV K7S SPECM Spectogram mode option R amp S FSV K14 Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 104 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 Notation TDS TD SCDMA base station UE measurements option R amp S FSV K76 K77 VSA Vector Signal Analysis option R amp S FSV K70 WCDMA 3GPP Base Station measurements option R amp S FSV K72 3GPP UE measure ments option R amp S FSV K73 WLAN WLAN TX measurements option R amp S FSV K91 The spectrum analysis mode is i
64. and retrieved later Thus you can easily switch between predefined display configurations Select Channel Opens a dialog box to select a channel and a slot Select Channel Slot Branch E Common Settings Select Channel Select Slot Select Branch Select Channel Select Channel Selects a channel for the calculation of the result diagrams CDP PWR RELATIVE ABSOLUTE POWER VS SLOT SYMBOL CONST and SYMBOL EVM see also chapter 6 2 Measurements and Result Diagrams on page 25 There are two ways to enter the channel numbers e Enter a channel number and spreading factor separated by a decimal point If the channel number and the spreading factor are entered simultaneously the entered channel is selected and marked in red if an active channel is involved For the display the channel number entered is converted on the basis of spreading factor 512 For unused channels the code resulting from the conversion is marked Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 49 R amp S FSV K73 Configuration of 3GPP FDD UE Measurements Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 Example Enter 5 128 Channel 5 is marked at spreading factor 128 30 ksps if the channel is active oth erwise code 20 at spreading factor 512 Enter a channel number without a decimal point In this case the instrument interprets the entered code as based on spreading factor 512 If the code entered corresponds to a used channel the entire asso
65. and transforms it to the spectrum by fast Fourier transformation FFT FFT is not available when using 5 Pole filters Channel filters or RRC filters In this case sweep mode is used Note The same applies when a tracking generator internal or external options R amp S FSV B9 B10 is active Remote command SWE TYPE FFT see SENSe SWEep TYPE on page 183 Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 94 R amp S FSV K73 Configuration of 3GPP FDD UE Measurements REENERT RF Measurements Auto Sweep Type Automatically sets the fastest available Sweep Type for the current measurement Auto mode is set by default Remote command SWE TYPE AUTO see SENSe SWEep TYPE on page 183 FFT Filter Mode Sweep Type Defines the filter mode to be used for FFT filters by defining the partial span size The partial span is the span which is covered by one FFT analysis Auto FFT Filter Mode Sweep Type The firmware determines whether to use wide or narrow filters to obtain the best mea surement results Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution FFT on page 176 Narrow lt FFT Filter Mode Sweep Type For an RBW lt 10kHz the FFT filters with the smaller partial span are used This allows you to perform measurements near a carrier with a reduced reference level due to a narrower analog prefilter Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution
66. automatic checking of the absolute basic values of adjacent channel power as defined in mobile radio standards Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt k gt irrelevant Parameters lt LowerLimit gt first value 200DBM to 200DBM limit for the lower and the upper lt UpperLimit gt adjacent channel RST 200DBM Example CALC LIM ACP ACH ABS 35DBM 35DBM Sets the absolute limit value for the power in the lower and upper adjacent channel to 35 dBm CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel ABSolute STATe lt State gt This command activates the limit check for the adjacent channel when adjacent channel power measurement Adjacent Channel Power is performed Before the command the limit check for the channel adjacent channel measurement must be globally switched on using CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower STATe The result can be queried with CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel RESuLt It should be noted that a complete measurement must be performed between switching on the limit check and the result query since otherwise no correct results are available Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt k gt irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 137 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 DEE CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Example CALC LIM ACP ACH 30DB 30DB Sets
67. control channel is displayed in the upper part of the channel table The HS DPCCH can be switched on or of at for a duration of 1 5 frame 3 slots 2ms Power control is applicable too The Enhanced Dedicated Physical Control Channel is used to carry control information for uplink high speed data channels EDPDCH It is used in HSUPA signal setup The data rate is fixed to 15ksps This control channel is displayed in the upper part of the channel table EDPDCH The Enhanced Dedicated Physical Data Channel is used to carry UPLINK data for high speed channels EDPDCH It is used in HSUPA signal setup The data rate and code allocation depends on the number of DPDCH and HS DPCCH refer to table below This data channel is displayed in the lower part of the channel table The following parameters of these channels are determined by the CDP measurement Chan Type Type of channel active channels only Ch SF Number of channel spreading code 0 to spreading factor Sym Rate ksps Symbol rate at which the channel is transmitted 15 ksps to 960 ksps T Offs Chips Stat Status display Codes that are not assigned are marked as inactive chan nels TFCl Indication whether the data channel uses TFCI symbols PilotL Bits Number of pilot bits of the channel only valid for the control channel DPCCH Pwr Abs dBm Pwr Rel Indication of the absolute and relative channel power referred
68. displayed in blue with almost the same level c Above a frequency error of approx 2 kHz a CDP measurement cannot be per formed The R amp S FSV displays all possible codes in blue with a similar level 3 Settings on the R amp S SMU FREQ 2 1175 GHz a Set the signal generator center frequency to 2 1175 GHz again FREQ 2 1175 GHz Note CH The analyzer center frequency should not differ from the DUT frequency by more than 2 kHz Setting Behaviour with Incorrect Scrambling Code A valid CDP measurement can be carried out only if the scrambling code set on the analyzer is identical to that of the transmitted signal 1 Test setup SELECT BS MS BS 1 ON SCRAMBLING CODE 0001 The scrambling code is set to 0000 on the analyzer 2 Settings on the R amp S SMU The CDP display shows all possible codes with approximately the same level 3 Settings on the R amp S FSV Set scrambling code to new value MEAS CONFIG Sync Scrambling Settings Scrambling Code 01 4 Measurement on the R amp S FSV Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 15 R amp S FSV K73 Measurement Examples R amp S FSV K73 Measurement 4 Triggered Measurement of Relative Code Domain Power The CDP display shows the test model again Note The scrambling code setting of the analyzer must be identical to that of the measured signal 3 4 Measurement 4 Triggered Measurement of Relative Code Domain Power If the code domain power measurement is p
69. division in the result diagram The range is the length for one section of the y axis DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe PDIVision on page 197 Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 61 R amp S FSV K73 Configuration of 3GPP FDD UE Measurements a SS SS SS SSS a a ee Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 Ref Value Position Scaling The Ref Value Position softkey opens an edit dialog box to adjust the position the ref erence value of the y axis 0 100 100 is at the top of the screen 0 is at the bottom of the screen DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RPOSition on page 198 Preamp On Off Switches the preamplifier on and off If option R amp S FSV B22 is installed the preamplifier is only active below 7 GHz If option R amp S FSV B24 is installed the preamplifier is active for all frequencies This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command INPut GAIN STATe on page 206 RF Atten Manual Mech Att Manual Opens an edit dialog box to enter the attenuation irrespective of the reference level If electronic attenuation is activated option R amp S FSV B25 only El Atten Mode Auto soft key this setting defines the mechanical attenuation The mechanical attenuation can be set in 10 dB steps The RF attenuation can be set in 5 dB steps with option R amp S FSV B25 1 dB steps The range is specified
70. g UO Analyzer mode and gated trigger switched off Maximum allowed range limited by the sweep time pretriggermax sweep time When using the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 with UO Analyzer mode the maximum range is limited by the number of pretrigger samples See the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 description in the base unit In the External or IF Power trigger mode a common input signal is used for both trigger and gate Therefore changes to the gate delay will affect the trigger delay trigger offset as well Remote command TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence HOLDoff TIME on page 208 Softkeys of the Trace Menu TRACE key R amp S FSV K73 The TRACE key is used to configure the data acquisition for measurement and the analysis of the measurement data The following chapter describes all softkeys available in the Trace menu in 3GPP FDD UE Mode for Code Domain Analysis measurements For RF measurements see the description for the base unit GIG NV E 66 e EE 67 MIMA On aa a aaa a A A aa eaa EA A a A A ARA 67 AVAGO EE EE 67 Vu 67 Clear Write Overwrite mode the trace is overwritten by each sweep This is the default setting Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 66 R amp S FSV K73 Configuration of 3GPP FDD UE Measurements a SSS SSS SS ES SS a a a a ee Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 All available detectors can be selected Remote command DISP TRAC
71. gt CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum LEFT on page 118 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum LEFT on page 133 CALC MARK MIN RIGH gt CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum RIGHt on page 120 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum RIGHt on page 134 CALC MARK MIN NEXT abs CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum NEXT on page 119 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum NEXT on page 133 7 1 11 Softkeys of the Auto Set Menu AUTO SET Key R amp S FSV K73 The AUTOSET key opens a menu to configure automatic settings This chapter describes the softkeys available for CDA measurements For RF measurements see the description for the base unit Eeer ee 72 PRION G aster T detansvaevadatnsancnssaeecaticene ae taasuteraecavuauhesaasaaeautadaunsseeeiateees ts 72 Auto Serambling ee TEE 72 E e EEN 72 L Meas Time Manual 72 L Meas Te Atert 72 L Upper Level Hvsteresls 72 L Lower Level Hvsteresls 73 Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 71 R amp S FSV K73 Configuration of 3GPP FDD UE Measurements a SSS SSE a a ee Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 Auto All Performs all automatic settings e Auto Level on page 72 e Auto Scrambling Code on page 72 Remote command SENSe ADJust ALL on page 173 Auto Level Defines the optimal reference level for the current measurement automatically The measurement time for automatic l
72. in the data sheet If the current reference level cannot be set for the set RF attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 The RF attenuation defines the level at the input mixer according to the formula le Velmixer lEVelinput RF attenuation Note As of firmware version 1 61 the maximum mixer level allowed is 0 dBm Mixer levels above this value may lead to incorrect measurement results which are indicated by the OVLD status display The increased mixer level allows for an improved signal but also increases the risk of overloading the instrument Remote command INPut ATTenuation on page 200 RF Atten Auto Mech Att Auto Sets the RF attenuation automatically as a function of the selected reference level This ensures that the optimum RF attenuation is always used It is the default setting This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command INPut ATTenuation AUTO on page 201 EI Atten On Off This softkey switches the electronic attenuator on or off This softkey is only available with option R amp S FSV B25 Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 62 R amp S FSV K73 Configuration of 3GPP FDD UE Measurements a SSS SSE ee Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 When the electronic attenuator is activated the mechanical and elec
73. limit check and the result query since otherwise no valid results are available Suffix lt n gt 1 4 irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC LIM ACP ACH ABS STAT ON Switches on the check of absolute limit values for the adjacent channels Mode WCDMA CALCulate lt n gt LIMit1 ACPower ACHannel RESult This command queries the result of the limit check for the upper lower adjacent channel in the selected measurement window when adjacent channel power measurement is performed If the power measurement of the adjacent channel is switched off the command produces a query error Suffix lt n gt 1 4 irrelevant Parameters The result is returned in the form lt result gt lt result gt where lt result gt PASSED FAILED and where the first returned value denotes the lower the second denotes the upper adjacent chan nel Example CALC LIM ACP ACH RES Queries the limit check result in the adjacent channels Sets the relative limit value for the power in the lower and upper adjacent channel to 30 dB below the channel power Usage Query only Mode WCDMA Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 113 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 DEEG CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit1 ACPower ALTernate lt ch gt RELative This command defines the limit for the selected alternate adjacent channel in the selected measurement wind
74. lt numeric value gt 0 CAPTURE_LENGTH 1 Parameters lt Frame gt lt numeric value gt RST 1 Example CDP FRAM VAL 1 Mode WCDMA SENSe CDPower FRAMe LVALue lt Value gt Selects the frame to be analyzed Parameters lt Value gt lt numeric value gt 0 CAPTURE_LENGTH 1 RST 0 Example SENS CDP FRAM 1 Mode WCDMA Manual operation See IQ Capture Settings on page 41 See Frame To Analyze on page 42 SENSe CDPower HSDPamode lt State gt This command selects if the HS DPCCH channel is searched or not Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 161 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 SENSe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Parameters lt State gt ON The HSUPA HSDPA channel can be detected RST ON OFF The HSUPA HSDPA channel cannot be detected Example CDP HSDP OFF Mode WCDMA Manual operation See Channel Detection Settings on page 44 See HS DPA UPA on page 45 SENSe CDPower HSLot lt State gt This command switches the R amp S FSV K73 between the analysis of one half and one full slot Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example SENS CDP HSL ON Mode WCDMA Manual operation See Demod Settings on page 47 See Meas Interval on page 48 SENSe CDPower ICThreshold lt ThresholdLevel gt This command defines the minimum power that a single channel must have compared to the total signal in order to be regarded as an active c
75. on page 153 Query of results Remote CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer RESult on page 124 CCDF The CCDF softkey starts a measurement of the distribution function of the signal ampli tudes complementary cumulative distribution function The CCDF and the Crest factor are displayed For the purposes of this measurement a signal section of user definable length is recorded continuously in the zero span and the distribution of the signal ampli tudes is evaluated Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 79 R amp S FSV K73 Configuration of 3GPP FDD UE Measurements RF Measurements The following user specific settings are not modified on the first access following preset ting e Reference Level Reference Level Offset e Center Frequency Frequency Offset e Input Attenuation Mixer Level e All trigger settings Pressing the CCDF softkey activates the analyzer mode with defined settings CCDF TRACE1 DETECTOR SAMPLE BW RES BW MANUAL 10 MHz VIDEO BW MANUAL 5 MHz To restore adapted measurement parameters the following level parameters are saved on exiting and are set again on re entering this measurement Level Parameters e RBW e NO OF SAMPLES For further details about the CCDF measurements refer to the description in the base unit CONFigure WCDPower MS MEASurement on page 153 or CALCulate lt n gt STATistics CCDF STATe on page 149 Query of results CALC
76. on the rear panel of the analyzer to the reference output REF on the rear panel of the R amp S SMU coaxial cable with BNC connectors Settings on the R amp S SMU See chapter 3 2 Measurement 2 Measurement of the Spectrum Emission Mask on page 13 Settings on the R amp S FSV See chapter 3 2 Measurement 2 Measurement of the Spectrum Emission Mask on page 13 in addition SETUP REFERENCE EXT Measurement on the R amp S FSV The displayed frequency error should be lt 10 Hz Note CH The reference frequencies of the analyzer and of the DUT should be synchronized Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 14 R amp S FSV K73 Measurement Examples R amp S FSV K73 oe ES a aa a a Measurement 3 Measurement of the Relative Code Domain Power Setting Behaviour with Deviating Center Frequency Setting In the following the behaviour of the DUT and the analyzer with an incorrect center fre quency setting is shown 1 Test setup Tune the center frequency of the signal generator in 0 5 kHz steps and watch the analyzer screen 2 Measurement on the R amp S FSV a ACDP measurement on the analyzer is still possible with a frequency error of up to approx 1 kHz Up to 1 kHz a frequency error causes no apparent difference in measurement accuracy of the code domain power measurement b Above a frequency error of 1 kHz the probability of an impaired synchronization increases With continuous measurements at times all channels are
77. on the title page of the release notes The current release notes are provided in the Internet Conventions Used in the Documentation Typographical Conventions The following text markers are used throughout this documentation Convention Description Graphical user interface ele All names of graphical user interface elements on the screen such as dia ments log boxes menus options buttons and softkeys are enclosed by quota tion marks KEYS Key names are written in capital letters File names commands File names commands coding samples and screen output are distin program code guished by their font Input Input to be entered by the user is displayed in italics Links Links that you can click are displayed in blue font References References to other parts of the documentation are enclosed by quotation marks Conventions for Procedure Descriptions When describing how to operate the instrument several alternative methods may be available to perform the same task In this case the procedure using the touchscreen is described Any elements that can be activated by touching can also be clicked using an additionally connected mouse The alternative procedure using the keys on the instru ment or the on screen keyboard is only described if it deviates from the standard oper ating procedures The term select may refer to any of the described methods i e using a finger on the touchscreen
78. operated in the horizontal position on an even surface The ambient temperature does not exceed the range specified in the data sheet Signal levels at the input connectors are all within the specified ranges Signal outputs are correctly connected and are not overloaded Failure to meet these conditions may cause damage to the instrument or other devices in the test setup This section describes how to set up the analyzer for 3GPP FDD UE user equipment tests As a prerequisite for starting the test the instrument must be correctly set up and connected to the AC power supply as described in chapter 1 of the operating manual for the analyzer Furthermore application firmware module R amp S FSV K73 must be properly installed following the instructions provided in the operating manual for the analyzer Standard Test Setup Connect antenna output or TX output of UE to RF input of the analyzer via a power attenuator of suitable attenuation The following values are recommended for the external attenuator to ensure that the RF input of the analyzer is protected and the sensitivity of the analyzer is not reduced too much Max power Recommended ext attenuation 355 to 60 dBm 35 to 40 dB 350 to 55 dBm 30 to 35 dB 345 to 50 dBm 25 to 30 dB 340 to 45 dBm 20 to 25 dB 335 to 40 dBm 15 to 20 dB 330 to 35 dBm 10 to 15 dB 325 to 30 dBm 5 to 10 dB 320 to 25 dBm 0 to 5 dB lt 20 dBm 0 dB Operatin
79. operation See Marker 1 2 3 4 on page 68 See Marker Norm Delta on page 69 See Select 1 2 3 4 A on page 69 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRACe lt Trace gt This command selects the trace a marker is positioned on The corresponding trace must have a trace mode other than Blank If necessary the corresponding marker is switched on prior to the assignment Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt depends on mode Selects the marker Parameters lt Trace gt 1 6 Trace number the marker is positioned on Example CALC MARK3 TRAC 2 Assigns marker 3 to trace 2 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X lt Position gt This command positions a marker on a particular coordinate on the x axis If marker 2 3 or 4 is selected and used as delta marker it is switched to marker mode Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Parameters lt Position gt Numeric value that defines the marker position on the x axis The unit is either Hz frequency domain or s time domain or dB sta tistics Range The range depends on the current x axis range Example CALC MARK2 X 1 7MHz Positions marker 2 to frequency 1 7 MHz Manual operation See Marker 1 2 3 4 on page 68 See Select 1 2 3 4 A on page 69 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMits STATe lt State gt This command turns marker search limits on and off Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 121
80. parameter return value absolute values are returned The query is only possible in frame mode and not in slot mode regardless of the display mode Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window Return values lt Result gt lt slot number gt lt level value in dBm gt Comma separated list with 15 pairs of slots slot number of CPICH and level values for 15 slots Default unit Hz Example CALC2 FEED XTIM CDP PVSLot ABSolute Sets the result display for screen B to POWER VS SLOT TRAC2 DATA TPVSlot Returns a list of absolute frequency errors for all slots in trace 2 screen B Usage Query only Mode WCDMA TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt t gt This command returns the trace data Depending on the display mode the trace data format varies For details see chapter 7 1 3 Measurement Modes in Code Domain Ana lyzer on page 51 CODE PWR ABSOLUTE RELATIVE CHANNEL TABLE For each channel the class the channel number the absolute level the relative level and the timing offset are returned The class denotes the spreading factor of the channel Class 8 corresponds to the highest spreading factor 256 symbol rate 15 ksps class 2 to the lowest admissible spreading factor 4 symbol rate 960 ksps CODE PWR ABSOLUTE RELATIVE The channels are output in ascending order sorted according to the code numbers i e in the same sequence as they are displayed on the screen For CHANNEL TABLE the channels are sorted accor
81. remote control in the Quick Start Guide a description of the basic analyzer commands and pro gramming examples is given Information on maintenance instrument interfaces and error messages is also provided Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 5 R amp S FSV K73 Preface Documentation Overview In the individual option manuals the specific instrument functions of the option are described in detail For additional information on default settings and parameters refer to the data sheets Basic information on operating the R amp S FSV is not included in the option manuals The following Operating Manuals are available for the R amp S FSV e R amp S FSV base unit in addition R amp S FSV K9 Power Sensor Support R amp S FSV K14 Spectrogram Measurement e R amp S FSV K7 Analog Demodulation and R amp S FSV K7S FM Stereo Measurements e R amp S FSV K10 GSM EDGE Measurement e R amp S FSV K30 Noise Figure Measurement e R amp S FSV K40 Phase Noise Measurement e R amp S FSV K70 Vector Signal Analysis Operating Manual R amp S FSV K70 Vector Signal Analysis Getting Started First measurements e R amp S FSV K72 3GPP FDD BTS Analysis e R amp S FSV K73 3GPP FDD UE Analysis e R amp S FSV K76 77 3GPP TD SCDMA BTS UE Measurement e R amp S FSV K82 83 CDMA2000 BTS MS Analysis e R amp S FSV K84 85 1xEV DO BTS MS Analysis e R amp S FSV K91 WLAN IEEE 802 1 1a b g j n e R amp S FSV K93 WiMAX IEEE 802 16 OFDM OFDMA Analysis e R amp S FSV K100
82. the base unit for information on the other softkeys available for RF meas urements LEE 60 CPSU EE 60 PREGUSNCY OSCE EE 60 Center Opens an edit dialog box to enter the center frequency The allowed range of values for the center frequency depends on the frequency span Span gt 0 SPAN pin 2 lt s feenter s fmax SPAN pin 2 span 0 0 Hz lt fcenter s fmax fmax and SpanNmin are specified in the data sheet Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 178 CF Stepsize Opens an edit dialog box to enter a fixed step size for the center frequency The step size defines the value by which the center frequency is increased or decreased when the arrow keys are pressed When you use the rotary knob the center frequency changes in steps of 10 of the Center Frequency Stepsize This softkey is available for code domain and power vs time measurements Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP on page 179 Frequency Offset Opens an edit dialog box to enter a frequency offset that shifts the displayed frequency range by the specified offset Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 60 R amp S FSV K73 Configuration of 3GPP FDD UE Measurements SSS T Ml ee es Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 The softkey indicates the current frequency offset The allowed values range from 100 GHz to 100 GHz The default setting is 0 Hz Remote command SENSe FREQuency OFFSet on page 180
83. the electronic and mechanical attenuation are summarized and the electronic attenuation can no longer be defined individually As soon as the stop or center frequency is reduced below 7 GHz electronic attenuation is available again If the electronic attenuation was defined manually it must be re defined The attenuation can be varied in 1 dB steps from 0 to 30 dB Other entries are rounded to the next lower integer value To re open the edit dialog box for manual value definition select the Man mode again If the defined reference level cannot be set for the given RF attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is output Remote command INPut EATT AUTO on page 205 INPut EATT on page 205 Ref Level Offset Opens an edit dialog box to enter the arithmetic level offset This offset is added to the measured level irrespective of the selected unit The scaling of the y axis is changed accordingly The setting range is 200 dB in 0 1 dB steps Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 198 Input AC DC Toggles the RF input of the R amp S FSV between AC and DC coupling Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 63 R amp S FSV K73 Configuration of 3GPP FDD UE Measurements 7 1 6 Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remo
84. the relative limit value for the power in the lower and upper adjacent channel to 30 dB below the channel power CALC LIM ACP ACH ABS 35DBM 35DBM Sets the absolute limit value for the power in the lower and upper adjacent channel to 35 dBm CALC LIM ACP ON Switches on globally the limit check for the channel adjacent channel measurement CALC LIM ACP ACH REL STAT ON Switches on the check of the relative limit values for adjacent channels CALC LIM ACP ACH ABS STAT ON Switches on the check of absolute limit values for the adjacent channels INIT WAI Starts a new measurement and waits for the sweep end CALC LIM ACP ACH RES Queries the limit check result in the adjacent channels CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel RELative lt LowerLimit gt lt UpperLimit gt This command defines the relative limit of the upper lower adjacent channel for adjacent channel power measurements The reference value for the relative limit value is the measured channel power It should be noted that the relative limit value has no effect on the limit check as soon as it is below the absolute limit value defined with the CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel ABSolute command This mechanism allows automatic check ing of the absolute basic values of adjacent channel power as defined in mobile radio standards Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt k
85. the span resolution bandwidth or video bandwidth the sweep time is automatically adjusted The R amp S FSV always selects the shortest sweep time that is possible without falsifying the signal The maximum level error is lt 0 1 dB compared to using a longer sweep time This softkey is available for measuring the Adjacent Channel Power the Spectrum Emis sion Mask and the Occupied Bandwidth Remote command SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO on page 183 Sweep Type Opens a submenu to define the sweep type This softkey is available for measuring the Signal Power the Adjacent Channel Power and the Occupied Bandwidth This function is not available in IQ Analyzer mode or for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 In frequency sweep mode the analyzer provides several possible methods of sweeping Sweep on page 94 FFT on page 94 not available with 5 Pole filters channel filters or RRC filters see chapter 6 3 5 Selecting the Appropriate Filter Type on page 30 e Auto on page 95 Sweep Sweep Type Sets the Sweep Type to standard analog frequency sweep In the standard sweep mode the local oscillator is set to provide the spectrum quasi analog from the start to the stop frequency Remote command SWE TYPE SWE see SENSe SWEep TYPE on page 183 FFT Sweep Type Sets the Sweep Type to FFT mode The FFT sweep mode samples on a defined frequency value
86. the table DPDCH The Dedicated Physical Data Channel is used to carry UPLINK data from the UE to the BS The code allocation depends on the total required symbol rate The following table represents the possible configurations of DPCH spreading factors and code allocation HSDPCCH The High Speed Dedicated Physical Control Channel for HS DCH is used to carry control information CQI ACK NACK for downlink high speed data channels HS DCH It is used in HSDPA signal setup The data rate is fixed to 15ksps The code allocation depends on the number of active DPCH and is described in the table below This control channel is displayed in the upper part of the channel table The HS DPCCH can be switched on or off after the duration of 1 5 frame or 3 slots or 2ms Power control is applicable too EDPCCH The Enhanced Dedicated Physical Control Channel is used to carry control infor mation for uplink high speed data channels EDPDCH It is used in HSUPA signal setup The data rate is fixed to 15ksps This control channel is displayed in the upper part of the channel table EDPDCH The Enhanced Dedicated Physical Data Channel is used to carry UPLINK data for high speed channels EDPDCH It is used in HSUPA signal setup The data rate and code allocation depends on the number of DPDCH and HS DPCCH refer to table below This data channel is displayed in the lower part of the chan nel table The following parameters
87. to be displayed Remote command SENSe CDPower FRAMe LVALue on page 161 Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 42 R amp S FSV K73 Configuration of 3GPP FDD UE Measurements a SS SS SS SSS a a ee Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 Capture Length IQ Capture Settings Enter the capture length amount of frames to record Remote command SENSe CDPower IQLength on page 162 Trigger Source External IQ Capture Settings Defines triggering via a TTL signal at the EXT TRIG GATE IN input connector on the rear panel An edit dialog box is displayed to define the external trigger level Remote command TRIG SOUR EXT see TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SOURce on page 209 Trigger Source Free Run IQ Capture Settings The start of a sweep is not triggered Once a measurement is completed another is started immediately Remote command TRIG SOUR IMM see TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SOURce on page 209 Trg Gate Polarity IQ Capture Settings Sets the polarity of the trigger gate source The sweep starts after a positive or negative edge of the trigger signal The default setting is Pos The setting applies to all trigger modes with the exception of the Free Run Power Sensor and Time mode For details also see Using Gated Sweep Operation in the base unit description Pos Level triggering the sweep is stopped by the logic 0 signal and restar ted by the logical 1 signal after
88. 0 R amp S FSV K73 Instrument Functions 3GPP User Equipment Measurements KEE dl Further Information The Gaussian filters are set by default The available bandwidths are specified in the data sheet e CISPR 6 dB filters e MIL Std 6 dB filters Note that the 6 dB bandwidths are available only with option R amp S FSV K54 e Channel filters For details see chapter 6 3 6 List of Available RRC and Channel Filters on page 31 Channel filters do not support FFT mode e RRC filters For details see chapter 6 3 6 List of Available RRC and Channel Filters on page 31 RRC filters do not support FFT mode e 5 Pole filters The available bandwidths are specified in the data sheet 5 Pole filters do not support FFT mode 6 3 6 List of Available RRC and Channel Filters For power measurement a number of especially steep edged channel filters are available see the following table The indicated filter bandwidth is the 3 dB bandwidth For RRC filters the fixed roll off factor a is also indicated Table 6 2 Filter types Filter Bandwidth Filter Type Application 100 Hz CFiLter 200 Hz CFiLter AO 300 Hz CFlLter 500 Hz CFiLter 1 kHz CFiLter 1 5 kHz CFiLter 2 kHz CFiLter 2 4 kHz CFiLter SSB 2 7 kHz CFiLter 3 kHz CFiLter 3 4 kHz CFiLter 4 kHz CFiLter DAB Satellite 4 5 kHz CFiLter 5 kHz CFiLter Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 31 R amp S FSV K73 Inst
89. 0 See Ref Level on page 41 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet lt Value gt This command defines a reference level offset Suffix lt n gt irrelevant lt t gt irrelevant Parameters lt Value gt Range 200 to 200 RST 0 Default unit dB Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV OFFS 10dB Manual operation See Frontend Settings on page 40 See Ref Level Offset on page 41 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RPOSition lt Position gt This command defines the position of the reference level on the display grid Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 198 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 BREET Other Commands Referenced in this Manual When using a tracking generator only with option R amp S FSV B9 or B10 requires active normalization and in Bluetooth mode option R amp S FSV K8 this command defines the position of the reference value for all windows Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt t gt irrelevant Parameters lt Position gt 0 PCT corresponds to the lower display border 100 corresponds to the upper display border Range 0 to 100 RST Spectrum mode 100 PCT with tracking generator or time display 50 PCT Default unit PCT Example DISP TRAC Y RPOS 50PCT Manual operation See Scaling on page 61 See Ref Value Position on page 62 See Ref Level Position on page 90 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe
90. 00 dB in 0 1 dB steps Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 198 Ref Level Position Opens an edit dialog box to enter the reference level position i e the position of the maximum AD converter value on the level axis The setting range is from 200 to 200 0 corresponding to the lower and 100 to the upper limit of the diagram Only available for RF measurements Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RPOSition on page 198 Grid Abs Rel Switches between absolute and relative scaling of the level axis not available with Linear range Only available for RF measurements Abs Absolute scaling The labeling of the level lines refers to the absolute value of the reference level Absolute scaling is the default setting Rel Relative scaling The upper line of the grid is always at 0 dB The scaling is in dB whereas the reference level is always in the set unit for details on unit settings see the Unit softkey Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MODE on page 197 Noise Correction If activated the results are corrected by the instrument s inherent noise which increases the dynamic range ON A reference measurement of the instrument s inherent noise is carried out The noise power measured is then subtracted from the power in the channel that is being examined The inherent noise of the inst
91. 10 OBW remote control ae OCCUPIED BANDWIDTH ossnnnnnnssessesnnnrnnnnsssserenn 153 Peak remote Control s s s eessen 118 132 Ph Noise Ref Fixed remote control 130 131 Ph Noise On Off remote control R amp S Support Range ing UMit ossiani Ane Guest Range Lin Unit remote control Range LINC AN Si ss cvcts caveccvessciesasentsentacatvereccrensatecosess Range Linear remote control Range Log remote control Range Log 100 dB sie cscs ctestencieduedaas Range Log 10 dB irienner Range Log 1 dB Sg D Range Log 50 QB EE Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 Index Range Log 5 dB e neungemegtetgugeieggg iania Range Log Manual RBW VBW Manual aes RBW VBW Noise IO 96 RBW VBW Pulse 1 RBW VBW Sine 1 3 iA eg Reference Position remote control 000ee 198 Ref Level remote control 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 151 Ref Level Offset 4 Ref Level Offset remote control eeeeee Ref Level POSION c scccccceiscsisccessscscacseeasceeascessnivoeecesois Ref Level Position remote control Ref Point Frequency remote control 06 129 Ref Point Level remote control Ref Point Time remote control WU Ref Value remote Control ceceeeeeeeteeeeeeeees Ref Value Position D Ref Value Position remote control eeesecceeeee 198 Res BW remote Cont
92. 2 01 51 R amp S FSV K73 Configuration of 3GPP FDD UE Measurements a SS SS ES SS a a ee Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 If some of the DPCH channels contain incorrect pilot symbols these channels are marked with the color green and an INCORRECT PILOT message is displayed in the status bar If HS DPA UPA is set to ON in the Channel Detection Settings Common Settings dialog box channels without pilot symbols e g channels of type HS PDSCH are rec ognized as active Remote command CALC FEED XPOW CDP see chapter 8 2 2 CALCulate FEED subsystem on page 108 Composite EVM RMS The Composite EVM measurement displays the error between the entire measurement signal and the ideal reference signal in present The error is averaged over all channels for different slots A bar diagram with EVM values versus slots is used The Composite EVM measurement covers the entire signal during the entire observation time Remote command CALC FEED XTIM CDP ERR MACC see chapter 8 2 2 CALCulate FEED subsys tem on page 108 Peak Code Domain Error Peak Code Domain Error display mode determines the maximum of the code domain error values for a given slot and for all codes This display is a bar diagram over slots The unit is dB The Peak Code Domain Error measurement covers the entire signal and the entire observation time Remote command CALC FEED XTIM CDP ERR PCD see chapter
93. 5 The Power Sensor Support firmware option R amp S FSV KQ9 provides the power mea surement functions for this test setup This softkey is only available if the R amp S FSV option Power Sensor R amp S FSV KQ is installed For details see the chapter Instrument Functions Power Sensor K9 in the base unit description This softkey is available for RF measurements Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 101 RF Measurements Trigger Out Sets the Trigger Out port in the Additional Interfaces option R amp S FSV B5 only to low or high Thus you can trigger an additional device via the external trigger port for example Remote command OUTPut TRIGger on page 213 R amp S FSV K73 8 8 1 8 2 8 2 1 8 2 2 8 2 3 8 2 4 8 2 5 8 2 6 8 3 8 4 8 5 8 5 1 8 5 2 8 5 3 8 6 8 6 1 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 In this section all remote control commands specific to the user equipment test option R amp S FSV K73 are described in detail For details on conventions used in this chapter refer to chapter 8 1 Notation on page 104 For further information on analyzer or basic settings commands refer to the correspond ing subsystem in the base unit description In particular the following subsystems are identical to the base unit refer to the base unit description e CALCulate DELTamarker e CALCulate MARKer except for the specific commands described in chapt
94. 6 7590 02 01 72 R amp S FSV K73 Configuration of 3GPP FDD UE Measurements 7 1 12 Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 Lower Level Hysteresis Settings Defines a lower threshold the signal must exceed before the reference level is automat ically adjusted when the Auto Level function is performed Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFiguration HYSTeresis LOWer on page 173 Softkeys of the Input Output Menu for CDA Measurements The following chapter describes all softkeys available in the Input Output menu for CDA measurements For RF measurements see chapter 7 2 6 6 Softkeys of the Input Out put Menu for RF Measurements on page 101 PIE ACDC MEET 73 E TEE 73 SHG EE 73 L Pea Pe ieisccsesntscicvsiniisaattcdssnnanisdnasanaitceduannandiddesanniucdetsnawtodudanebiticutnaubasstssnad 74 L Connected e E 74 L Input Sample Hate 74 Eege geuerdnet 74 e U eee crn Vern eerie Wer rrr 74 L Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level 74 Digital e Are TEE 74 BIO DEE 75 L EE 75 El 76 e E 76 L Firmware Update 76 L R amp S EE 76 H ier EE 76 Input AC DC Toggles the RF input of the R amp S FSV between AC and DC coupling This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command INPut COUPling on page 201 Noise Source Switches the supply voltage for an external noise source on or off For details on con nectors refer to the R amp S FSV Quick St
95. 73 CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Manual operation See Next Min on page 71 See Next Min Mode on page 71 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum PEAK This command positions the delta marker to the current trace minimum The correspond ing delta marker is activated first if necessary Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC DELT3 MIN Sets delta marker 3 to the minimum value of the associated trace CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum RIGHt This command positions the delta marker to the next higher trace minimum on the right of the current value i e ascending X values The corresponding delta marker is activated first if necessary If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC DELT MIN RIGH Sets delta marker 1 to the next higher minimum value to the right of the current value Manual operation See Next Min Mode on page 71 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe lt State gt This command turns delta markers on and off If the corresponding marker was a normal marker it is turned into a delta marker No suffix at DELTamarker turns on delta marker 1 Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement wi
96. 73 channel power relative l1QIMbalance UO imbalance PSYMbol Number of pilot bits ACHannels Number of active channels MPIC average power of the inactive codes for the selected slot Example CALC MARK FUNC WCDP RES PTOT Usage Query only Mode WCDMA MS Manual operation See Result Summary on page 55 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion ZOOM lt State gt If marker zoom is activated the number of channels displayed on the screen in code domain power and code domain error power result diagram is reduced to 64 The currently selected marker defines the center of the displayed range Suffix lt n gt irrelevant lt m gt 1 4 marker number Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK FUNC ZOOM ON Mode WCDMA Manual operation See Marker Zoom on page 69 8 2 6 Other CALCulate Commands Referenced in this Manual 8 2 6 1 CALCulate DELTamarker subesvstem eee e cette eee e eee eeaeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeneeaaas 129 8 2 6 2 CALCulate LIMit aubsvstem cc eect eee eettte eee e ee ete eerste eaaeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeenaaeeeeeeeeaas 136 8 2 6 3 CALCulate LIMit ESPectrum subevsiem cece eee eeeeee eee eeceee eee eaaeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeaas 143 8 2 6 4 CALCulate PSE SUDSYStOM 00 2 cece ee eee er ttte eter rete tae etter ete etaaeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeaaas 147 8 2 6 5 CALCulate STATistics subsvetem eee ccteeeee cette eettte eter rete eettaeeeeeeeeeetiaaeeeeeeeneeeaaas 149 8 2 6 6 Other Referenced CALC
97. 8 2 2 CALCulate FEED subsys tem on page 108 EVM vs Chip For the Meas Interval Slot see Demod Settings on page 47 the Error Vector Mag nitude EVM is displayed for all chips of the slected slot For the Meas Interval Halfslot see Demod Settings on page 47 the EVM is displayed for the chips of one half slot The selected slot halfslot can be varied Possible entries are 0 to 14 for Slot and 0 to 29 for Halfslot The EVM is calculated as the root of the squared difference between the received and reference signal The reference signal is estimated out of the channel configurations of all active channels The EVM is given in percent referred to the square root of the mean power of the reference signal 2 e a EVM 100 N 2560 ke 0 a7 1 palal where Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 52 R amp S FSV K73 Configuration of 3GPP FDD UE Measurements Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 EVM vector error of the chip EVM of chip number k Sk complex chip value of received signal Xk complex chip value of reference signal k index number of the evaluated chip N number of chips at each CPICH slot n index number for mean power calculation of reference signal Remote command CALC FEED XTIM CDP CHIP EVM see chapter 8 2 2 CALCulate FEED subsys tem on page 108 Mag Error vs Chip For the Meas Interval Slot see Demod Set
98. ACLR Adjacent channel power measurement standard 3GPP WCDMA Forward with predefined settings ESPectrum Measurement of spectrum emission mask WCDPower Code domain power measurement This selection has the same effect as command INSTrument SELect POWer Channel power measurement standard 3GPP WCDMA Forward with predefined settings OBANdwith OBWidth Measurement of occupied power bandwidth CCDF Measurement of complementary cumulative distribution function RST WCDPower Example CONF WCDP MS MEAS POW Mode WCDMA CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle STATe lt State gt This command switches the channel table on or off When switch on takes place the measured channel table is stored under the name RECENT and is switched on After the RECENT channel table is switched on another channel table can be selected with the command CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle SELect on page 155 Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CONF WCDP CTAB ON Mode WCDMA Manual operation See Channel Detection Settings on page 44 See Channel Search Mode on page 45 CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle NAME lt FileName gt This command selects an existing channel table or creates the name of a new channel table Parameters lt FileName gt lt file name gt RST RECENT Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 154 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 CONFigure WCDPower subsystem R amp S FSV K73
99. ACTor on page 180 0 5 Span span gt 0 CF Stepsize Sets the step size for the center frequency to 50 of the span Remote command FREQ CENT STEP LINK SPAN see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK on page 179 FREQ CENT STEP LINK FACT 50PCT see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK FACTor on page 180 0 5 RBW span gt 0 CF Stepsize Sets the step size for the center frequency to 50 of the resolution bandwidth Remote command FREQ CENT STEP LINK RBW see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK on page 179 FREQ CENT STEP LINK FACT 50PCT see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK FACTor on page 180 x Span span gt 0 CF Stepsize Opens an edit dialog box to set the step size for the center frequency as a percentage of the span Remote command FREQ CENT STEP LINK SPAN see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK on page 179 FREQ CENT STEP LINK FACT 20PCT see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK on page 179 x RBW span gt 0 CF Stepsize Opens an edit dialog box to set the step size for the center frequency as a percentage of the resolution bandwidth Values between 1 and 100 in steps of 1 are allowed The default setting is 10 Remote command FREQ CENT STEP LINK
100. ALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO Y 30 DBM Sets the reference level to 30 dBm CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt LINK lt State gt This command links delta marker 1 to marker 1 If you change the horizontal position of the marker so does the delta marker Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt 1 irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT LINK ON Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 131 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum LEFT This command positions the delta marker to the next smaller trace maximum on the left of the current value i e descending X values The corresponding delta marker is acti vated first if necessary If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC DELT MAX LEFT Sets delta marker 1 to the next smaller maximum value to the left of the current value Manual operation See Next Peak Mode on page 70 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum NEXT This command positions the delta marker to the next smaller trace maximum The cor responding delta marker is activated first if necessary If no next
101. ALCulate lt n gt CDPoOwer Mapping ccsscsscscesecenestessssssecsssensenscnsesenpaeeecenensauenensansetsenenesseeaoneteononsenseasonens 107 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mz EUNGCionFlxedRbOmt 129 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mz EUNGCionFl edRbOmty 129 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mz FUNGCionFixedtGTATel 130 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mz EUNGCHonPhNOtse AUTO 130 CAlCulate nz D I Tamarker mz FUNGC onPNOselGTATel eens cesses eeeeseseeeseaeeeeseeessateseaeees 131 CALCulate cnz DEI Tamarker mz LINK 131 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimUM LEET 132 CAL Culate nz DEI Tamarker mz MAximum NENT 132 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt 2133 CAL Culate nz DEI Tamarker mz MAximumf PDEART 132 CAL Culate nz DEI Tamarker mz MiNmmum LEET 133 CAL Culate nz DEI Tamarker mz MiNmumNENT nennen 133 CAL Culate nz DEI Tamarker mz MiNmmum HIGH 134 CAL Culate nz DEI Tamarker mz MiNmmumf PDEART 134 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt TRACe CALCulatesn gt DEL Tamarker lt im gt Xirosi sila aves avi lalegecpedueetaaicgatnencdhecassshancdhccneatvedstdenlaatial aiana 135 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mz SREL ative tritt ntt tatti rnst nnttt tnnt En natnn arenan tnnnse nn nne nnne 135 CAL Culate nz DEI Tamarkercmzs vi 136 CAL Culate cnz DEL Tamarker mztGTATel eeki eeskttsknttetintstinstknrtntinnstinnttnnnnnnnnstnnntennnnn ennt CAL Culatesn gt FEED EE CALCulate lt n gt LIMit1 ACPower ACHannel ABSolute CAL Culate cnz L
102. Alternative scrambling codes can not be detected Therefore the range for detection is 0x0000 Ox1FFOh where the last digit is always 0 If the search is successful PASS a code was found and can be queried using SENSe CDPower LCODe SEARch LIST Parameters lt Status gt PASSed Scrambling code s found FAILed No scrambling code found Example SENS CDP LCOD SEAR Searches the scrambling code that leads to the highest signal power and returns the status of the search Usage Query only Mode WCDMA Manual operation See Auto Scrambling Code on page 72 SENSe CDPower LCODe SEARch LIST This command returns the automatic search sequence see SENSe CDPower LCODe SEARch IMMediate on page 163 Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 163 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 SENSe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Return values Return value lt Code decimal gt lt Code hexadecimal gt lt CPICH power dBm gt for each detected scrambling code A comma separated result table of the highest power values and the corresponding scrambling codes in decimal and hexadecimal format Example SENS CDP LCOD SEAR LIST Result 16 0x10 18 04 32 0x20 22 87 48 0x30 27 62 64 0x40 29 46 Explanation in table below Mode WCDMA code dec code hex CPICH power dBm 16 0x10 18 04 32 0x20 22 87 48 0x30 27 62 64 0x40 29 46
103. CDPower lee 165 ISEhlSechtbeweerCHE b ie ekcEENEEN NEES ENNER REENEN AREKAK aa ia 165 SENSGJECDPOWEr ARTE 165 SENSe COPOWEROINVelt caria ceteris ade ves ethene ees 166 Ei Ee EISE 166 SENSeCOPOWEMSLOT noieira eck coed en kaiaia agebdasessacatedadeesslesdaniestanstagzers 166 SENSe CDPower BASE lt BaseValue gt This command defines the base of the CDP analysis Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 159 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 REENEN SENSe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Parameters lt BaseValue gt SLOT FRAMe SLOT Only one slot of the signal is analyzed FRAMe The complete 3GPP frame is analyzed RST FRAMe Example CDP BASE SLOT Mode WCDMA Manual operation See IQ Capture Settings on page 41 See Analysis Mode on page 42 SENSe CDPower CODE lt CodeNumber gt This command sets the code number The code number refers to code class 8 spreading factor 256 Parameters lt CodeNumber gt Range 0 to 255 RST 0 Example SENS CDP CODE 128 Mode WCDMA Manual operation See Select Channel on page 49 See Select Channel on page 49 SENSe CDPower ETCHips lt State gt This command selects length of the measurement interval for calculation of error vector magnitude EVM In accordance with 3GPP specification Release 5 the EVM measure ment interval is one slot 4096 chips minus 25 us at each end of the burst 3904 chips if power changes are expected
104. Culat lt n gt DEL Tamarket sma Y ncaa rinena a a iaaa aa i aiai ia 136 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FIXed RPOint X lt Reference gt This command defines the horizontal position of the fixed delta marker reference point The coordinates of the reference may be anywhere in the diagram When measuring the phase noise the command defines the frequency reference for delta marker 2 Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Parameters lt Reference gt Numeric value that defines the horizontal position of the reference For frequency domain measurements it is a frequency in Hz For time domain measurements it is a point in time in s RST Fixed reference OFF Example CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO X 128 MHz Sets the frequency reference to 128 MHz CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FlXed RPOint Y lt RefPointLevel gt This command defines the vertical position of the fixed delta marker reference point The coordinates of the reference may be anywhere in the diagram When measuring the phase noise the command defines the level reference for delta marker 2 Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 129 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 DEE CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Parameters lt RefPointLevel gt Numeric value that defines the ver
105. E EE 74 Digital 1Q Info B Remote Control sis scccscccsssitiescondssecsedessnecessnetaarsaceecnes 201 Softkey 74 Bandwidth display configuration we 49 TEE 91 EU 49 RESOIMHOM eege deu ededer EEN 92 defining 49 VT E E 92 predefined 49 Blank trace MOde iino saat deg seg deerb eda i 30 removing we 49 Cellule EE 49 C display mode Bitstreai E 59 Capture Lengtti duergeet aaia 43 Code Domain Channel Table cccccccceceee 57 Carrier Freq Error 56 Code Domain Error 0004 BT CODE besides eet gegeckst A dee aeavedatenteess 79 Code Domain POWE cccccccceceeee Si Complementary cumulative distribution function Code Domain Result Summary Sp 79 Composite Const ee we DA CDP channel parameter ccccceeeeceeeeeesteeeeeeeeeneeeees 57 Composite EVM 52 Center frequency EVM vs Chip 52 e EE Frequency Err vs Slot 59 CF Stepsize Mag Error vs Chip 53 SOMMOY ss ege cdecee giegh tinaaa geed EE ee Ee 60 Peak Code Domain Error 52 Ch SF Phase Discontinuity vs Slot 60 channel Phase Error vs Chip 22 12 wa 54 e E Power vs Slot EECH 54 59 channel assignment table i Symbol Const o c ccscsccsessesessesssessseseseesessesssesessessesees 59 channel detection settings cccceeeeeesseeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeees Symbol EVM ou a Sg Channel tables Symbol Magnitude Error wa 55 Copying us A Symbol Phas
106. E Solution AUTO 176 IEN Ge IDGANDwiblDWIDODTRE Solution 176 IEN Ge IDGANDwicblDWIDODTRE Solution HRATIo 177 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution TWPE 177 SENSe CDPower BASE EIER ege E EE SENSe CDPoweriE Ke Ee 160 SENSe CDPower FIL Ter S RE 161 IEN Ge ICDbPower ERAMel LVAL ue 161 SENSe CDPower FRAMEe VALUE 2 eccc2 s ccecscanceassacevecsedevescduadaschedusadhsavennestecanebaehecesdesdisutbeaeeteedteeeecnetnees 161 SENSe CDPower HSDPamode cccsesceseecsreccestensensostensecenseeeossoasacensendentensencnseesenseasatenseneessensnensneaonsene 161 SENSe GDPOWerHSL EE 162 SENSe CDPower ICThreshold c ccsscscsscessccsstensssesssenssscensseeseecnesoessssnasecedsassnseecnssesscssenseesostasonseaseataestens 162 SENSe CDPower QLength IEN Ge ICDbPowerlLCOtDe GEAROH LIST 163 IEN Ge ICDbPowerlLCOtDe GEAbRch DMMedhatel 163 SENS CDPow r CODE YP etug gege ageet ege lege 163 SENSe CDPower l CODe AL Oe aveees cance cessessedasteeeneee avanti eadaveaai in ansiapeevneeieee nana andivel 164 IEN Ge ICDbPowerl EVel ADlust tittat En tAE EEAEAENEAAEAEENENEESEAEENEEEEANEREAE EAEE EE Ennen ennt 164 O Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 220 R amp S FSV K73 List of Commands SENSe CDPOWERMAPP ING DEE 165 EISE e Reg ell 165 SENSe CDPower OVERVieW sii dead roni aaa a a aaa a E E a ANENA 165 SENS6 CDPO Wer PDISpl Ynnssrirsrnensiii aaa a a da Edel E 165 ISENS er Eege e ei VE U ensesi
107. E aN NENE AN APD remote control eeceeeeeee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ASCII File Export remote control d Auto remote Control eececeeeee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee Auto All iscttais avian saint d e Eugen Average Mode remote control C N remote Control cc eeeeeceeeeeeeeteeeeeeeee 124 125 C No remote Control ccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 124 125 CCDF reirnos CCDF remote control 149 150 CF Stepsize remote control eeeeeeereeees 179 Channel Bandwidth remote control 167 168 Channel Detection Settings eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 44 Channel Spacing remote control 171 172 Continue Single Sweep remote Control 211 Continuous Sweep remote control 0e 212 Cont Meas remote control e Coupling Ratio ET CP ACP MC ACLR remote control 124 125 Default Coupling Default Settings remote control 00 150 152 Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 224 R amp S FSV K73 Demodulation Settings 47 Descrambling Sync Search Settings 44 Deviation Lin Log remote control ME Ve a le EN Edit ACLR Limit remote control 136 137 138 139 140 141 El Atten Mode Auto Man 1 63 89 Fast ACLR On Off remote control 0 008 172 NIC ek 97 Filter Type remote control 176 177 Frequency Offset 22
108. EED XTIM CDP PVSL see chapter 8 2 2 CALCulate FEED subsystem on page 108 Symbol Magnitude Error The Symbol Magnitude Error is calculated analogous to symbol EVM The result of calculation is one symbol magnitude error value for each symbol of the slot of a special channel Positive values of symbol magnitude error indicate a symbol magnitude that is larger than the expected ideal value negative symbol magnitude errors indicate a symbol magnitude that is less than the ideal one The symbol magnitude error is the difference of the magnitude of the received symbol and that of the reference symbol related to the magnitude of the reference symbol Remote command CALC FEED XTIM CDP SYMB EVM MAGN see chapter 8 2 2 CALCulate FEED subsystem on page 108 Symbol Phase Error The Symbol Phase Error is calculated analogous to symbol EVM The result of calcu lation is one symbol phase error value for each symbol of the slot of a special channel Positive values of symbol phase error indicate a symbol phase that is larger than the expected ideal value negative symbol phase errors indicate a symbol phase that is less than the ideal one Remote command CALC FEED XTIM CDP SYMB EVM PHAS see chapter 8 2 2 CALCulate FEED subsystem on page 108 Result Summary The Result Summary display mode selects the numerical display of all results Three different tables are available depen
109. ENSe FREQuency STARt lt Frequency gt This command defines the start frequency for measurements in the frequency domain Parameters lt Frequency gt 0 to fmax min span RST 0 fmax IS specified in the data sheet min span is 10 Hz Example FREQ STAR 20MHz Manual operation See Start on page 83 SENSe FREQuency STOP lt Frequency gt This command defines the stop frequency for measurements in the frequency domain Parameters lt Frequency gt min span to fmax RST fmax fmax iS specified in the data sheet min span is 10 Hz Example FREQ STOP 2000 MHz Manual operation See Stop on page 83 SENSe SWEep COUNt lt NumberSweeps gt This command defines the number of sweeps started with single sweep which are used for calculating the average or maximum value If the values 0 or 1 are set one sweep is performed Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 181 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 Dee SENSe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Parameters lt NumberSweeps gt 0 to 32767 RST 0 GSM 200 PHN 1 Example SWE COUN 64 Sets the number of sweeps to 64 INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for its end Manual operation See Sweep Count on page 65 SENSe SWEep POINts lt NumberPoints gt This command defines the number of measurement points to be collected during one sweep Note For Spurious Emissions measureme
110. Emission Mask 4 Measurement on the R amp S FSV The following is displayed e Spectrum of the 3GPP FDD UE signal e Limit line defined in the standard e Information on limit line violations passed failed Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 13 R amp S FSV K73 Measurement Examples R amp S FSV K73 Measurement 3 Measurement of the Relative Code Domain Power 3 3 Measurement 3 Measurement of the Relative Code Domain Power A code domain power measurement on one of the channel configurations is shown in the following Basic parameters of CDP analysis are changed to demonstrate the effects of non signal adapted values 1 Test setup Connect the reference input EXT REF IN OUT on the rear panel of the analyzer to the reference output REF on the rear panel of R amp S SMU coaxial cable with BNC connectors Settings on the R amp S SMU See chapter 3 2 Measurement 2 Measurement of the Spectrum Emission Mask on page 13 Settings on the R amp S FSV See chapter 3 2 Measurement 2 Measurement of the Spectrum Emission Mask on page 13 in addition SETUP REFERENCE EXT Measurement on the R amp S FSV Frequency error The displayed frequency error should be lt 10 Hz Setting Synchronization of the Reference Frequencies Synchronization of the reference oscillators both of the DUT and the analyzer strongly reduces the measured frequency error 1 Test setup Connect the reference input EXT REF IN OUT
111. FFT on page 176 Coupling Ratio Opens a submenu to select the coupling ratios for functions coupled to the bandwidth This softkey and its submenu is available for measuring the Adjacent Channel Power the Spectrum Emission Mask the Occupied Bandwidth and the CCDF RBW VBW Sine 1 1 Coupling Ratio Sets the following coupling ratio video bandwidth resolution bandwidth This is the default setting for the coupling ratio resolution bandwidth video bandwidth This is the coupling ratio recommended if sinusoidal signals are to be measured This setting takes effect if you define the video bandwidth automatically Video BW Auto Remote command BAND VID RAT 1 see SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo RATio on page 178 RBW VBW Pulse 1 Coupling Ratio Sets the following coupling ratio video bandwidth 10 x resolution bandwidth or video bandwidth 10 MHz max VBW This coupling ratio is recommended whenever the amplitudes of pulsed signals are to be measured correctly The IF filter is exclusively responsible for pulse shaping No addi tional evaluation is performed by the video filter Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 95 R amp S FSV K73 Configuration of 3GPP FDD UE Measurements REESEN RF Measurements This setting takes effect if you define the video bandwidth automatically Video BW Auto Remote command BAND VID RAT 10 see SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo RATio on page 178
112. For details refer to the cor responding menu descriptions Importing and Exporting UO Data As of firmware version 1 60 UO data can be imported from a file for processing in R amp S FSV K73 and captured I Q data can be stored to a file IQ Import IQ Export softkeys in the Save Rcl menu For details see the base unit description Importing and Exporting UO Data As of firmware version 1 63 I Q data can be imported from a file for processing in R amp S FSV K73 and captured I Q data can be stored to a file IQ Import IQ Export softkeys in the Save Rcl menu For details see the base unit description To display help to a softkey press the HELP key and then the softkey for which you want to display help To close the help window press the ESC key For further information refer to chapter 1 3 How to Use the Help System on page 8 Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 24 R amp S FSV K73 Instrument Functions 3GPP User Equipment Measurements Measurements and Result Diagrams 6 2 Measurements and Result Diagrams The 3GPP user equipment measurement option provides Code Domain Measurements and RF measurements listed below Code Domain Measurements The Code Domain Measurement option provides the following test measurement types and result diagrams which are available via the Display Config softkey or the Display Config button in the Settings Overview see Display Config on page 49 e Code Domain Power
113. G key R amp S FSM 65 Softkeys of the Trace Menu TRACE key R amp S FSM 66 Softkeys of the Marker Menu MKR key R amp S FSV K73 ccc ceccsceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenteaaas 68 Softkeys of the Marker To Menu MKR gt key R amp S EGV KOOL 69 Softkeys of the Auto Set Menu AUTO SET Key R amp S FSV K73 ceeeeeteeee 71 Softkeys of the Input Output Menu for CDA Measurements rrenen 73 RE Measurements ina ss SEENEN SSES SES deen 77 Output Power Measurements ttrt Ett EEEE EEE EAEAN EEEE EEEE E Ennn 77 Spectr m EMISSION Mask 77 Adjacent Channel Power LACH 78 Occupied Bapndwigdth 2218 REREENENE Eed dE ENEE a ai a aiaia deen 79 CCDF icici min aaa a aa a a a iaae ai daaa a aai eii 79 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements KC 80 Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 The Code Domain Analyzer softkey activates the code domain analyzer measurement mode and opens the submenu to set the measurement Refer to chapter 7 1 Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 on page 35 for an introduction to the code domain analyzer settings For a brief introduction to the display concept of the code domain analyzer measurements refer to chapter 7 1 1 Display Concept on page 35 Display Concept Measurement results The code domain analyzer can show up to four result diagrams in four different screens windows at one time For each screen you can define which type of result diagram is to be displayed or deacti
114. Halfslot see Demod Settings on page 47 the phase error is displayed for the chips of one half slot The selected slot halfslot can be varied Possible entries are 0 to 14 for Slot and 0 to 29 for Halfslot The phase error is calculated as the difference between the phases of the received and reference signal The reference signal is estimated out of the channel configurations of all active channels The magnitude error is given in grad ranging from 180 to 180 PHI As glx N 2560 Feln N 2 where PHI phase error of chip number k Sk complex chip value of received signal Xk complex chip value of reference signal k index number of the evaluated chip N number of chips at each CPICH slot Q x phase calculation of a complex value Remote command CALC FEED XTIM CDP CHIP PHAS see chapter 8 2 2 CALCulate FEED subsys tem on page 108 Composite Constellation The Composite Const measurement analyzes the entire signal for one single slot For large numbers of channels to analyze the results will superimpose In that case the benefit of this measurement is limited senseless In Composite Const measurement the constellation points of the 1536 Chips for the specified slot are displayed This data is determined inside the DSP even before the channel search l e it is not possible to assign constellation points to channels The con stellation points are displayed normalized w
115. I Starts a new measurement and waits for the sweep end CALC LIM ACP ALT2 RES Queries the limit check result in the second alternate adjacent channels CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower STATe lt State gt This command switches on and off the limit check for adjacent channel power measure ments The commands CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel RELative STATe or CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ALTernate lt Channel gt RELative STATe must be used in addition to specify whether the limit check is to be performed for the upper lower adjacent channel or for the alternate adjacent channels Suffix lt n gt lt k gt Parameters lt State gt Example Selects the measurement window irrelevant ON OFF RST OFF CALC LIM ACP ON Switches on the ACLR limit check CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt FAIL This command queries the result of a limit check Note that for SEM measurements the limit line suffix lt k gt is irrelevant as only one specific SEM limit line is checked for the currently relevant power class Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 142 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possib
116. II File Export Format on page 33 The decimal separator decimal point or comma for floating point numerals contained in the file is defined with the FORMat DEXPort DSEParator command see FORMat DEXPort DSEParator on page 210 Suffix lt n gt window For applications that do not have more than 1 measure ment window the suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Trace gt 1to6 selected measurement trace lt FileName gt DOS file name The file name includes indication of the path and the drive name Indication of the path complies with DOS conventions Example MMEM STOR TRAC 3 TEST ASC Stores trace 3 in the file TEST ASC OUTPut IF SOURce lt Source gt This command selects the source of the IF output Parameters lt Source gt IF intermediate frequency output viDeo video output 200 mV RST IF Example OUTP IF VID Selects the video signal for the IF output connector Manual operation See Video Output on page 101 OUTPut TRIGger lt PortLevel gt This command selects level of the Trigger Out port Thus you can trigger an additional device via the external trigger port for example Parameters lt PortLevel gt LOW HIGH RST LOW Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 213 Other Commands Referenced in this Manual Example OUTP TRIG HIGH Manual operation See Trigger Out on page 102 SYSTem DISPlay UPDate lt State gt In remote control mode this com
117. IMuT ACbowerACHannel AbBGoluteG AaTe 113 CAL Culate cnz LIMuT ACPowerACHannel RE Gut 113 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit1 ACPower ACHannel RELative cee ee eee ee ceeeeesaeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeesseeseneeseaeees 111 CAL Culate cnz LIMuT ACPowerACHannell REI atvelG AaTe noenee nernrriesirrtesrnnrernrnsrrnn nne 112 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit1 ACPower ALTernate lt 1 11 gt ABSolute STATE cc cceseeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeae 115 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit1 ACPower ALTernate lt 1 11 gt RESult CAL Culate cnzLIMuT ACbowerAlTemate IizAbBGolute CAL Culate cnz LIMuT ACbowerAl Temate chzfREIL atvel CAL Culate cnz LIMuT ACbowerAl Temate chfREIL atvelG Aate eerie renren rer nerrrnrrn rnes 114 CAL Culate cnzLIMuT AChbowertGTATel nne 111 CAL Culate cnzLlMitckzACbowerACHannelAbGolute 136 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel ABSolute STATe 137 CAL Culate cnzLlMitckzACbowerACHannelbRtGuhb ne 138 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel RELative 0 ee cece ee ceeeeseeseeeeeseeeeseaeeseeeeseaeesseeseaeees 138 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel RELative STATC 00 0 eec cece ceee een eeeeeeeeseeseseeeeeeeteneeseaeees 139 CAL Culate cnzLlMitckzACbowerAl Temate Channelz AbBGolute nne 140 CAL Culate cnzLlMitckzACbowerAl Temate ChannelztREl atvelG ATe eerren 141 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ALTernate lt channel gt RELative CAlLCulate cnzLlMitzks AChbowert STATE a ena nanara aranna aaa
118. It should be noted that a complete measurement must be performed between switching on the limit check and the result query since otherwise no valid results are obtained Suffix lt n gt 1 4 irrelevant lt ch gt 1 11 alternate channel Parameters lt State gt RST OFF Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 114 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 Deeg CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Example CALC LIM ACP ACH REL STAT ON Switches on the check of the relative limit values for the first alter nate adjacent channels Mode WCDMA CALCulate lt n gt LIMit1 ACPower ALTernate lt 1 11 gt ABSolute This command defines the absolute limit value for the selected alternate adjacent channel power measurement Adjacent Channel Power in the selected measurement window The numeric suffix after ALTernate denotes the first or the second alternate channel It should be noted that the absolute limit value for the limit check has no effect as soon as it is below the relative limit value defined with CALC LIM ACP ALT REL This mech anism allows automatic checking of the absolute basic values defined in mobile radio standards for the power in adjacent channels The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters RST 200DBM The first value is the limit for the lower and the upper alternate adjacent channel The second limit value is ignored but must be indicated for reasons of compatibi
119. K73 Configuration of 3GPP FDD UE Measurements RF Measurements If an RMS detector is used the video bandwidth in the hardware is bypassed Thus duplicate trace averaging with small VBWs and RMS detector no longer occurs However the VBW is still considered when calculating the sweep time This leads to a longer sweep time for small VBW values Thus you can reduce the VBW value to achieve more stable trace curves even when using an RMS detector Normally if the RMS detector is used the sweep time should be increased to get more stable trace curves For details on detectors see chapter 6 3 3 Detector Overview on page 28 This softkey is available for measuring the Adjacent Channel Power the Spectrum Emis sion Mask and the Occupied Bandwidth Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo AUTO on page 178 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo on page 177 Video BW Auto Couples the video bandwidth to the resolution bandwidth If you change the resolution bandwidth the video bandwidth is automatically adjusted This setting is recommended if a minimum sweep time is required for a selected resolution bandwidth Narrow video bandwidths result in longer sweep times due to the longer set tling time Wide bandwidths reduce the signal noise ratio This softkey is available for measuring the Adjacent Channel Power the Spectrum Emis sion Mask and the Occupied Bandwidth Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo AUTO on page
120. ME The name of the channel table may contain a maximum of 8 characters This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an RST value and has no query Parameters lt FileName gt lt file_name gt name of the new channel table Example CONF WCDP MS CTAB COPY CTAB 2 Mode WCDMA CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle DELete This command deletes the selected channel table The channel table to be deleted is selected with the command CONF WCDP MS CTAB NAME Example CONF WCDP MS CTAB DEL Mode WCDMA CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle CATalog This command reads out the names of all channel tables stored on the hard disk Syntax of output format lt Sum of file lengths of all subsequent files gt lt free memory on hard disk gt lt 1st file name gt lt 1st file length gt lt 2nd file name gt lt 2nd file length gt lt nth file name gt lt nth file length gt Example CONF WCDP MS CTAB CAT Usage Query only Mode WCDMA Manual operation See Channel Detection Settings on page 44 See Predefined Tables on page 45 CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle EDATa This command defines the values of the selected channel table Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 157 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 a ee ee E INSTrument subsystem Code class code class of channel 1 Number of active channels 0 to 4 ECDP rel 1 measured value of channel 1 only when queried ECDP rel
121. NC FIX STAT ON The command activates the corresponding delta marker if necessary Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC DELT3 X REL Outputs the frequency of delta marker 3 relative to marker 1 or relative to the reference position Manual operation See Marker 1 2 3 4 on page 68 Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 135 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 DEENEN CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt Y This command queries the measured value of a delta marker The corresponding delta marker is activated if necessary The output is always a relative value referred to marker 1 or to the reference position reference fixed active To obtain a correct query result a complete sweep with synchronization to the sweep end must be performed between the activation of the delta marker and the query of the y value This is only possible in single sweep mode Depending on the unit defined with CALC UNIT POW or on the activated measuring functions the query result is output in the units below Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for its end CALC DELT2 ON Switches on delta marker 2 CALC DELT2 Y Outputs measurement value of delta marker 2
122. No gt lt Start gt lt Stop gt lt Rbw gt lt Freq gt lt Levelabs gt lt Levelrel gt lt Delta gt lt Limitcheck gt lt unused1 gt lt unused2 gt An array of values is returned for each range of the limit line lt value array of range 1 gt lt value array of range 2 gt lt value array of range n gt No number of the limit line range Start Hz start frequency of the limit line range Stop Hz stop frequency of the limit line range Rbw Hz resolution band width of the limit line range Freq Hz frequency of the power peak within the range Power abs dBm absolute power of the peak within the range Power rel dB relative power of the peak within the range related to channel power Delta dB distance to the limit line in dB positive indicates value above the limit fail Limitcheck 0 1 Limit check pass 0 fail 1 indicates whether the power is below 0 or above 1 the limit line Unused1 2 for future use Default unit Hz Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 190 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 Dee TRACe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Example TRAC2DATA ATRACE2 Returns a list of absolute frequency errors for all slots in trace 2 screen B Usage Query only Mode WCDMA TRACe lt n gt DATA TPVSlot This command returns a list of absolute frequency errors vs slot for all slots In contrast to the scope presentation and the TRACE lt n gt
123. ON Switches on globally the limit check for the channel adjacent chan nel measurement CALC LIM ACP ACH STAT ON Switches on the check of the relative limit values for adjacent channels CALC LIM ACP ACH ABS STAT ON Switches on the check of absolute limit values for the adjacent channels INIT WAI Starts a new measurement and waits for the sweep end CALC LIM ACP ACH RES Queries the limit check result in the adjacent channels CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ALTernate lt Channel gt ABSolute lt LowerLimit gt lt UpperLimit gt This command defines the absolute limit value for the lower upper alternate adjacent channel power measurement Adjacent Channel Power Note that the absolute limit value for the limit check has no effect as soon as it is below the relative limit value defined with CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel RELative This mechanism allows automatic checking of the absolute basic values defined in mobile radio standards for the power in adjacent channels Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt k gt irrelevant lt Channel gt 1 11 the alternate channel Parameters lt LowerLimit gt first value 200DBM to 200DBM limit for the lower and the upper lt UpperLimit gt alternate adjacent channel RST 200DBM Example CALC LIM ACP ALT2 ABS 35DBM 35DBM Sets the absolute limit value for the power in the lower an
124. OSItION 00 eee cece eeee cere tease eeaeeteaeeseaeeseaeesseeeeaaees 198 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RVALUC 00 2 cc ceeccecccceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaeeeeeeeieeeeenees 199 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe e FORMat DEXPoit DSEPatator epaiek daaa a np iaa Nieida aiaa dE EE ESA INI Tiate lt n gt CONME8S tatit t att E rnat AESAEEEESAEEEEANEEANESEEAANSEEEAEEEEESEEEEAAEEEEEAEEEEAA EENES EE Ennn NEIE CONTINUOUS EE INN Eu EE Jl ME RTE E INPut ATTenuation y INPutATTenuaton AUTO INPE COUPIO mane na a a E aaar e EE E EE INPut lee Blue INPUCDIQ RANGE AUT uegegeegriggehur eae daadaa aa a Naa deg ected decd ae dee INPUE DIO RANGE COUPIING ib ccicssiccaseccesneduessies aiaiai E E eaa aei aaa INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer see Jl Tel le Me RTR TR EE INPut DIQ SRAT E INPUCDIQ SRATE AUTO EE MIN tits MR EE ll Sg MR ER e E INPut EATT STATe z INPUEGAIN S TAT 6 rneer eaea eaae a a an riae i PA Aaea aa a E aaa a aaa Eea edee ege dd INPut IMPedanCe ugeet eege deet deer dE ON lge Oe INSTrument NSE L t tsiis a a a aai aaa aa a a aap oaa ena aa Jegen et MMEMory STORe lt n gt LIST ae ll le tel E e OQUTPUt IF ESOURCE inndrinn aaier Ea aaa ada iiaa aT Eataa a a Naa SUR an Ne EE STATus QUEStionable SYNC CONDItION 0 ee eee ten e eee eteeeeteeseaeeseaeeseaeeseaeeseaeeeeeseeesseeseaeenenees 184 Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 219 R amp S FSV K73 List of Commands
125. PEAK CAL Culate cnz MAbker mz MiNimum LEET CAL Culate cnz MAbRker mzMiNimumNENT rnnt CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum RIGHt CAL Culate cnz MAbRker mzMiNimumf PEART nnt CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt POWer RESult PHZ c cceeceeeeeeceeneeeeeeeeeeeeeccaeeeeseeaeeeeseceaeesseeeeeeseeueeeeeeees 120 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRACE ccccceceececeeeneeceeeneeeeecaeeeeecaeeseeaaeeeeeaaeeseeaaeeeseeaeeeseaeeessaeeeeeaaeeeseeaeeeeeas 121 CAL Culate lt n gt MARKERSIM gt EE 121 CAL Culate cnz MAbker mz XG lMite ZOONM nenene nnt 122 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMits STATe CAL Culate cnz MAbRkercmscy ttti ttttt ntu sttnnASEEAAEEEEAEEEEEAEEEAESEEEAEEEEEAEEEEEAAEEEESA EEEN EEE EnEn nnt 122 CAL Culatecnz MAbker mztSTATel CAlCulate cnz DEA aearchlbpGEarch AUTO CAL Culate cnz PDEARsearchlbGtarchMAhcGim nne CAlCulate cnz DEA aearchlbpGEarch PGHow eens eeeneeceeeeeeeseaeeseaeessaeseaeessaeeseaeeeseessseesseeeenaes CALCulate lt n gt PEAKsearch PSEarch SUBRanges CALCulate lt n gt PEAKsearch PSEarch IMMediate 0 c cee eeeseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeseaeessaeeseaeeseaeeseaeessaeeneaees CALCulat sn gt S TATIsticS CODEESTA TC sischese edea ap Ea Ee raa EEN eE a CAlulatecnzGTATlstcehGAMnles AAA ET e ENEE NEEN TE CALCulatecnzGTATlsticebREGutTracez A CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe AUTO ONCE CAL CulatecnzGTATlsticeGCAlexhRAhNGe CAL CulatecnzGTATlsticeGCAlexhRlEVel tnat n t
126. PRESET LEVEL 0 dBm FREQ 2 1175 GHz DIGITAL STD WCDMA 3GPP SET DEFAULT LINK DIRECTION UP REVERSE ado D TEST MODELS NOT STANDARDIZED C D960K STATE ON gt oO 3 Settings on the R amp S FSV PRESET CENTER 2 1175 GHz AMPT 0 dBm MODE 3GPP FDD UE MEAS POWER Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 12 R amp S FSV K73 Measurement Examples R amp S FSV K73 Measurement 2 Measurement of the Spectrum Emission Mask 3 2 Measurement 2 Measurement of the Spectrum Emis sion Mask The 3GPP specification defines a measurement which monitors the compliance with a spectral mask in a range of at least 12 5 MHz about the 3GPP FDD UE carrier To assess the power emissions in the specified range the signal power is measured in the range near the carrier by means of a 30kHz filter in the ranges far off the carrier by means of a 1MHz filter The resulting trace is compared to a limit line defined in the 3GPP specifi cation 1 Test setup Connect the RF output of the R amp S SMU to the RF input of the R amp S FSV coaxial cable with N connectors 2 Settings on the R amp S SMU PRESET LEVEL 0 dBm FREQ 2 1175 GHz DIGITAL STD WCDMA 3GPP SET DEFAULT LINK DIRECTION UP REVERSE a 00 Oo TEST MODELS NOT STANDARDIZED C D960K STATE ON gt 0 3 Settings on the R amp S FSV PRESET CENTER 2 1175 GHz AMPT 0 dBm MODE 3GPP FDD UE MEAS Spectrum
127. R amp S FSV K73 3GPP FDD UE Measurement Operating Manual TL 1176 7590 02 01 ES remen Test amp Measu Operating Manual This manual describes the following R amp S FSV options e R amp S FSV K73 1310 8555 02 This manual describes the following R amp S FSV models with firmware version 2 0 and higher e R amp S FSV A 1321 3008K04 e R amp S FSV 7 1321 3008K07 e R amp S FSV 13 1321 3008K13 e R amp S FSV 30 1321 3008K30 R amp S FSV 40 1321 3008K39 e R amp S FSV 40 1321 3008K40 The firmware of the instrument makes use of several valuable open source software packages For information see the Open Source Acknowledgement on the user documentation CD ROM included in delivery Rohde amp Schwarz would like to thank the open source community for their valuable contribution to embedded computing 2013 Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG Muhldorfstr 15 81671 Munchen Germany Phone 49 89 41 29 0 Fax 49 89 41 29 12 164 E mail info rohde schwarz com Internet www rohde schwarz com Subject to change Data without tolerance limits is not binding R amp S is a registered trademark of Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG Trade names are trademarks of the owners The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual R amp S FSV is abbreviated as R amp S FSV R amp S FSV K73 Contents 1 GE 5 1 1 Documentation Overview 2 cccccccccceeeeeeee
128. R amp S FSV K73 CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum PCLass lt Class gt MAXimum lt Level gt This command sets the upper limit level for one power class The unit is dBm The limit always ends at 200 dBm i e the upper limit of the last power class can not be set If more than one power class is in use the upper limit must equal the lower limit of the next power class Suffix lt n gt irrelevant lt k gt irrelevant lt Class gt 1 4 the power class to be evaluated Parameters lt Level gt lt numeric value gt RST 200 Example CALC LIM ESP PCL1 MAX 40 dBm Sets the maximum power value of the first power class to 40 dBm CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum PCLass lt Class gt MINimum lt Level gt This command sets the minimum lower level limit for one power class The unit is dBm The limit always start at 200 dBm i e the first lower limit can not be set If more than one power class is in use the lower limit must equal the upper limit of the previous power class Suffix lt n gt irrelevant lt k gt irrelevant lt Class gt 1 4 the power class to be evaluated Parameters lt Level gt lt numeric_value gt RST 200 for class1 otherwise 200 Example CALC LIM ESP PCL2 MIN 40 dBm Sets the minimum power value of the second power class to 40 dBm CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum RESTore This command restores the pre
129. RBW see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK on page 179 FREQ CENT STEP LINK FACT 20PCT see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK on page 179 Center CF Stepsize Sets the step size to the value of the center frequency and removes the coupling of the step size to span or resolution bandwidth Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 82 R amp S FSV K73 Configuration of 3GPP FDD UE Measurements 7 2 6 2 RF Measurements This function is especially useful for measurements of the signal harmonics In this case each stroke of the arrow key selects the center frequency of another harmonic Marker CF Stepsize Sets the step size to the value of the current marker and removes the coupling of the step size to span or resolution bandwidth This function is especially useful for measurements of the signal harmonics In this case each stroke of the arrow key selects the center frequency of another harmonic Manual CF Stepsize Opens an edit dialog box to enter a fixed step size for the center frequency Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP on page 179 Start Opens an edit dialog box to define the start frequency The following range of values is allowed fmin fstart fmax SpanNmin fmin fmax aNd Spanmin are specified in the data sheet Remote command SENSe FREQuency STARt on page 181 Stop Opens an edit dialog box to defin
130. REES CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 8 2 4 CALCulate MARKer SUDSYStOM 000 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeecee tere eeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeeeeteeeaaeeeeeteeeaaaees 116 8 2 5 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer FUNCtION subavstem 123 8 2 6 Other CALCulate Commands Referenced in this Manuel 128 8 2 6 1 CALCulate DELTamarker SUDSYStOM 00 0 0 ee eee cece cette cette eter eee eetaeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeneeaas 129 8 2 6 2 CALCulate LIMit aubsvstem cc eter eee eettte terete ene eter ee taaeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeniaeeeeeeeeaas 136 8 2 6 3 CALCulate LIMit ESPectrum SUDSYStOM 0 eee eee cece scene ee eee eeteeeeeettaaeeeeeeenaeeeeeneeaas 143 8 2 6 4 CALCulate PSE SUDSYStOM 00 2 cece e cette tte e tere teeta dete ee sete etaaeeeeeeseeeeaeeeeeeeeeeaaas 147 8 2 6 5 CALCulate STATistics subsvetem eee cieeee eee e etree eter eee eeeneeeeeeeeeeetaaeeeeeeeneneaas 149 8 2 6 6 Other Referenced CALCulate Commande eee eetteeeeeeetnaeeeeeeneaas 153 8 2 1 CALCulate lt n gt CDPower subsystem CAL Culate lt n CD Power Mappi g ein nenin anii es an ideneeus EEN 107 CALCulate lt n gt CDPower Mapping lt SignalBranch gt This command adjusts the mapping for the result displays Code Domain Power and Code Domain Error Power Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window Parameters lt SignalBranch gt 1 Q AUTO l The I branch of the signal will be used for evaluation Q The Q branch of the signal will be used for evaluation AUTO The branch selected by the dialog Selected Channel
131. RVALue lt Value gt The command defines the power value assigned to the reference position in the grid When using a tracking generator this command requires active normalization Suffix lt n gt irrelevant lt t gt irrelevant Parameters lt Value gt RST 0 dB coupled to reference level Example DISP TRAC Y RVAL 20dBm Defines a reference position of 20 dBm Manual operation See Scaling on page 61 See Ref Value on page 61 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing lt ScalingType gt This command selects the scaling of the y axis Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt t gt irrelevant Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 199 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 8 8 2 Other Commands Referenced in this Manual Parameters lt ScalingType gt LOGarithmic Logarithmic scaling LiNear Linear scaling in LDB Linear scaling in dB RST LOGarithmic Example DISP TRAC Y SPAC LIN Select a linear scale Manual operation See Range on page 85 See Range Log 100 dB on page 86 See Range Log 50 dB on page 86 See Range Log 10 dB on page 86 See Range Log 5 dB on page 86 See Range Log 1 dB on page 87 See Range Log Manual on page 87 See Range Linear on page 87 See Range Lin Unit on page 87 INPut subsystem dl NEE 200 INPURAT TERUG RAL TO iiini naaa aa a AEAEE 201 e Il ee TTT EE 201 NPU DIO CDE VICE oirionn ccnatis ietnn
132. Ratio on page 95 See Default Coupling on page 97 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo RATio lt Ratio gt This command defines the ratio between video bandwidth Hz and resolution bandwidth Hz Note that the ratio defined with the remote command VBW RBW is reciprocal to that of the manual operation RBW VBW Parameters lt Ratio gt Range 0 01 to 1000 RST 3 Example BAND VID RAT 3 Sets the coupling of video bandwidth to video bandwidth 3 res olution bandwidth Manual operation See Coupling Ratio on page 95 See RBW VBW Sine 1 1 on page 95 See RBW VBW Pulse 1 on page 95 See RBW VBW Noise 10 on page 96 See RBW VBW Manual on page 96 See Span RBW Auto 100 on page 96 SENSe FREQuency CENTer lt Frequency gt This command defines the center frequency frequency domain or measuring frequency time domain Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 178 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 Parameters lt Frequency gt Example Manual operation SENSe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Range 0 to fmax RST fmax 2 Default unit Hz fmax IS specified in the data sheet min span is 10 Hz FREQ CENT 100 MHz See Frontend Settings on page 40 See Center on page 40 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP lt StepSize gt This command defines the center frequency step size Parameters lt StepSize gt Example Manual operation Range 1 to fmax
133. S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 description of the base unit Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 203 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 BREET Other Commands Referenced in this Manual Parameters lt Level gt lt numeric value gt Range 70 711 nV to 7 071 V RST 1V Example INP DIQ RANG 1V Mode A IQ NF TDS VSA CDMA EVDO WCDMA ADEMOD GSM OFDM OFDMA WiBro WLAN Manual operation See Signal Source on page 73 See Full Scale Level on page 74 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer UNIT lt Unit gt Defines the unit of the full scale level see Level Unit on page 74 The availability of units depends on the measurement application you are using This command is only available if the optional R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 is installed For details see the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 description of the base unit Parameters lt Level gt V dBm dBpW W dBmV dBuV dBuA A RST Volt Example INP DIQ RANG UNIT A Mode IQ VSA EVDO CDMA WCDMA GSM ADEMOD TDS Manual operation See Signal Source on page 73 See Level Unit on page 74 INPut DIQ SRATe lt SampleRate gt This command specifies or queries the sample rate of the input signal from the R amp S Digital UO Interface see Input Sample Rate on page 74 This command is only available if the optional R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 is installed
134. S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command INPut IMPedance on page 206 Softkeys of the Bandwidth Menu The following table shows all softkeys available in the Bandwidth menu It is possible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys If a softkey is only avail able with a special option model or measurement mode this information is provided in the corresponding softkey description For Spurious Emission Measurements the settings are defined in the Sweep List dialog see the description in the base unit EE 92 By EE 92 Video On UE 92 Video BW AWO EE 93 Sweeptime Manual gue deEEA ENEE anaa tiaa EENEG 93 SWE nime AWO DEET 94 Sweep AN KEE 94 E EE 94 LRR EE 94 Kate 95 L FFT Filter Mode 95 GE 95 8 ET 95 Coupling RAND ET 95 L RBW VBW Sine DI 95 L RBW VBW Pulse 71 95 Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 91 R amp S FSV K73 Configuration of 3GPP FDD UE Measurements a Se es RF Measurements L RBW VBW Noise Hetto gedet 96 L CT ET DEE 96 L Span RBW Auto DO 96 L Span RBW Manual 96 e E MTN EE 97 SI ee 97 Res BW Manual Opens an edit dialog box to enter a value for the resolution bandwidth The available resolution bandwidths are specified in the data sheet For details on the correlation between resolution bandwidth and filter type refer to chap ter 6 3 5 Selecting the Appropriate Filter Type on page 30 Numeric input is always rounded to the
135. Slot Slot Power Code Power Display defined in Demod lt gs on page 47 Capture Analysis Mode Slot Frame defined in IQ Captur gs on page 41 SE eem ee Fopering Manual 1176 7590 02 01 36 R amp S FSV K73 Configuration of 3GPP FDD UE Measurements Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 Overview of all measurement settings You can easily display an overview of all measurement settings using the Settings Overview on page 39 softkey In addition to the information in the diagram header each screen title contains diagram specific trace information Screen focus One of the screens has a blue frame indicating the focus The screen focus can be changed just like in the base system The settings for trace statistics and markers can only be changed for the focussed screen Furthermore the focussed screen can be set to full screen for details see the R amp S FSV Quick Start Guide 7 1 1 1 Defining the display configuration 1 Select the Display Config softkey in the Code Domain Analyzer menu 2 Select the tab for the screen you want to configure A D 3 Select the Screen X active option to display the selected screen Tip SCPI command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt STATe on page 195 4 Select the required result diagram to be displayed in the selected screen Tip SCPI command CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 108 5 Press Close To select a predefine
136. TRAC MODE AVER Switches on trace averaging SWE COUN 20 Setting the sweep counter to 20 sweeps INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the 20 sweeps INIT CONM WAI Continues the measurement next 20 sequences and waits for the end Manual operation See Continue Single Sweep on page 64 INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous lt State gt This command determines whether the trigger system is continuously initiated continu ous or performs single measurements single The sweep is started immediately Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON Example INIT CONT OFF Switches the sequence to single sweep INIT CONT ON Switches the sequence to continuous sweep Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 211 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 BREET Other Commands Referenced in this Manual Mode all Manual operation See Continuous Sweep on page 64 See Single Sweep on page 64 INITiate lt n gt ESPectrum This command starts a Spectrum Emission Mask measurement Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Example INIT ESP Starts a Spectrum Emission Mask measurement INITiate lt n gt IMMediate The command initiates a new measurement sequence With sweep count gt 0 or average count gt 0 this means a restart of the indicated number of measurements With trace functions MAXHold MINHold and AVERage the previous results
137. TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis lt Value gt This command sets the limit that the hysteresis value for the IF power trigger has to fall below in order to trigger the next measurement Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt Value gt RST 3 dB Example TRIG SOUR IFP Sets the IF power trigger source TRIG IFP HYST 10DB Sets the hysteresis limit value TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence HOLDoff TIME lt Delay gt This command defines the length of the trigger delay A negative delay time pretrigger can be set in zero span only Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt Delay gt Range zero span sweeptime see data sheet to 30 s span 0 to 30s RST Os Example TRIG HOLD 500us Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 208 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 BEES Other Commands Referenced in this Manual Manual operation See IQ Capture Settings on page 41 See Trigger Offset on page 43 TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence LEVel EXTernal lt TriggerLevel gt This command sets the level of the external trigger source in Volt Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt Range 0 5V to 3 5V RST 1 4 V Example TRIG LEV 2V TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SLOPe lt Type gt This command selects the slope of the trigger signal The selected trigger slope applies to all trigger signal sources Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt Type gt
138. aaee a aA Erea AE EEEE REE RATNAKAR CAL Culate cnz LlMitck EGbechum LML CAL Culate cnzLlMitck EGbechum MODE CAL Culate cnzLlMitck EGbechum PDClLases Classz OUNI CAlCulate cnzLUlMitcksEGbechum PCLass Cassz UM GTATel 145 SS ee Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 217 R amp S FSV K73 List of Commands CAL Culate cnz LlMitck EGbechum PCLass CasszMAvimum 146 CAL Culate cnzLlMitck EGbechum PCLass Cassz MiNmmum 146 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum PCLass lt Class gt EXCLUSIVE c ccc ce eee eceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeteaeenaees 144 CAL Culate cnzLlMitck EGbechumbRtEGTore 146 CAL Culate cnz LlMitck EGbechumVAl ue 147 CAL Culatesn gt LIMItSK gt 2F AMC rre e ar e sesaeiatvsaeeuesste cai condense A EN EEEE 142 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF c ccccceccceeeeseeeeeeaaeeeesaneeeseaaeeeeeeaeeeeeaaeeseeaaeesesaaeeseseeeeesaaaeeeeeaaeeesseaeeeeea 117 CAlLCulate cnzMAbker mz FUNGCHon Chiche 123 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion WCDPower MS RESUuIt ccccccceeeseseeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeneeeeeseeneeeeeeeae 126 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtION ZOOM 00 eececcceeeceeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeeceeeeecaeeeeeceaeeeseeaeeeeseaeeesseeeeeseeeeeeee CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum LEFT CAL Culate cnz MAb ker mz MAvimum NENT CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXiMUM RIGHL 0 0 2 ccee eee cee eeeeeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeseeaeeeeeeaeeeseeeeeeseieeeeeee CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum
139. an 1 measure ment window the suffix lt n gt is irrelevant irrelevant ABSolute absolute scaling of the y axis RELative relative scaling of the y axis RST ABS DISP TRAC Y MODE REL See Grid Abs Rel on page 90 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe PDIVision lt Value gt This remote command determines the grid spacing on the Y axis for all diagrams where possible Suffix lt n gt lt t gt Parameters lt Value gt Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 irrelevant irrelevant numeric value the unit depends on the result display RST depends on the result display 197 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 BREET Other Commands Referenced in this Manual Example DISP TRAC Y PDIV 10 Sets the grid spacing to 10 units for example 10 dB in the Code Domain Power result display Mode CDMA BT EVDO TDS WCDMA Manual operation See Scaling on page 61 See Y per Div on page 61 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel lt ReferenceLevel gt This command defines the reference level With the reference level offset 0 the value range of the reference level is modified by the offset Suffix lt n gt irrelevant lt t gt irrelevant Parameters lt ReferenceLevel gt The unit is variable Range see datasheet RST 10dBm Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV 60dBm Manual operation See Frontend Settings on page 4
140. andwidth cccccccccccceceeeessessseeseeeeeeeeeees 92 RF Preamplifier B22 ccccceeceeeeeseeeetteeeeeees 41 62 88 RF signal power FRAG Be RMS VBW eet ive odied ch Joliet eege ebe 29 93 RMS detector isnag et odeta a a i 28 RRG Filter dredeidi e eidal a 42 E E E A seg A ATE E A 161 RX Settings SOKOV vease a aae ia iid an 76 S Sample detesto oiii EE duech tee aaa 28 Sample rate Digital UO Interface remote control 204 205 Digital IQ sise itavisen i dea 74 scaling EE Stn a ieda edi 90 SCPI Conformity information s str 104 search MINIMUM EE 71 TEE 70 Select Channel KIZ ett egene Dieter eg 49 Select Channel Slot Branch s 49 Select Slot KIZ umerene e EE E aeeheaeAd 50 settings Settings Overview KI 39 Signal Source e fw ET Remote control Se 33 le softkey 0 1 Demod WOREN enuegegugeeke geed ess ee dere EN Out EE EN 0 1 RBW remote control ceeeeee 179 180 0 1 Span 0 5 RBW 0 5 Span 0 5 Span remote control 179 180 of Adj Chan remote Control 167 of Samples remote control 149 of TX Chan remote control 170 EEE TE ACLR Abs Rel remote control ACLR Ref Setting remote control 0 ee Adjacent Channel Power acd Se Adjust Ref Level remote control ceeeee Adjust Settings remote control cccceeeeeeee All Marker Off ii AMPE euena iiin EA
141. annel in the selected measurement window for adjacent channel power measure ments The numeric suffix after ALTernate denotes the alternate channel If the power measurement of the adjacent channel is switched off the command produces a query error Suffix lt n gt 1 4 irrelevant Parameters The result is returned in the form lt result gt lt result gt where lt result gt PASSED FAILED and where the first second returned value denotes the lower upper alternate adjacent channel Example CALC LIM ACP ALT2 RES Queries the limit check result in the second alternate adjacent channels Usage Query only Mode WCDMA CALCulate MARKer subsystem CAL Culate nz M AbkercmzACOEtF nene 117 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXiIMUM LEET 117 CAL Culate nz M AbkermzMAximumNENT 117 CAL Culate nzM Abkercmz M ANimum PDEAKT nn nenerrrsnsnrenererorornrnnnnene 118 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimUM RIGHL ccccccccseccceeseesesceeseeseceeeseecaneeeeeeneeeeeees 118 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINIMUM ILEFT 0ccccescccceeceeesseeceeceeceeseceesseceenececeeeeenees 118 CAL Culate nz M Abkermz MiNimumNENT 119 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum PEAK A 119 CAL Culate nz M Abker mz MiNimum HIGH 120 CAL Culate nz M Abker mz POVerbRESuCbH Z innnan naiiai iina 120 CAL Culate nzM AbkercmtGTAaTel runur entnererererorororeserernnnnnnn nn 120 CALCu latesn MARKerem gt TRACE
142. aramter RHO for each slot Indicates the number of active channels detected in the signal in the selected slot Both the detected data channels and the control channels are considered active channels Carrier Freq Error Displays the frequency error in the selected slot referred to the center frequency of the analyzer The absolute frequency error is the sum of the analyzer and DUT frequency error Differences of more than 1 kHz between transmitter and receiver frequency impair the synchronization of the CDP measurement For this reason the transmitter and receiver should be synchronized see chapter Getting Started Trigger to Frame This result displays the timing offset from the beginning of the recorded signal section to the start of the analyzed 3GPP FDD UE frame In the case of triggered data collection this timing offset is identical with the timing offset of frame trigger trigger offset frame start In the case of failure of the synchronization of the analyzer and 3GPP FDD UE signal the value of Trigger to Frame is not significant Avg Power Intact Chan Pk CDE 30 ksps The power in the code domain of all inactive channels is averaged to give the user an overview on the difference between active and inactive channels The Pk CDE measurement specifies a projection of the difference between the test signal and the ideal reference signal onto the selected spreading factor in the selected slot The spread
143. are reset on restarting the measurement In single sweep mode you can synchronize to the end of the measurement with OPC OPC or WAI In continuous sweep mode synchronization to the end of the measure ment is not possible Thus it is not recommended that you use continuous sweep mode in remote control as results like trace data or markers are only valid after a single sweep end synchronization Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode DISP WIND TRAC MODE AVER Switches on trace averaging SWE COUN 20 Setting the sweep counter to 20 sweeps INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the 20 sweeps Mode all MMEMory STORe lt n gt LIST lt FileName gt This command stores the current list evaluation results ina lt file name gt dat file The file consists of a data section containing the list evaluation results Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt FileName gt lt file name gt Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 212 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 DEE Other Commands Referenced in this Manual Example MMEM STOR LIST test Stores the current list evaluation results in the test dat file MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe lt Trace gt lt FileName gt This command stores the selected trace in the specified window in a file with ASCII for mat The file format is described in chapter 6 3 7 ASC
144. art Guide Front and Rear Panel chapter Remote command DIAGnostic lt n gt SERVice NSOurce on page 210 Signal Source Opens a dialog box to select the signal source For Digital Baseband UO the source can also be configured here Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 73 R amp S FSV K73 Configuration of 3GPP FDD UE Measurements SE a a ee Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 Input Path Signal Source Defines whether the RF Radio Frequency or the Digital IQ input path is used for measurements Digital IQ is only available if option R amp S FSV B17 R amp S Digital UO Interface is installed Note Note that the input path defines the characteristics of the signal which differ sig nificantly between the RF input and digital input Remote command INPut SELect on page 207 Connected Device Signal Source Displays the name of the device connected to the optional R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 to provide Digital IQ input The device name cannot be changed here The device name is unknown Remote command INPut DIQ CDEVice on page 201 Input Sample Rate Signal Source Defines the sample rate of the digital UO signal source This sample rate must correspond with the sample rate provided by the connected device e g a generator Remote command INPut DIQ SRATe on page 204 Full Scale Level Signal Source The Full Scale Level defines the level that should correspond to an
145. ating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 143 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 Example CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 CALC LIM ESP LIM 50 50 70 Defines the following power classes lt 200 50 gt lt 50 50 gt lt 50 70 gt lt 70 200 gt Query CALC LIM ESP LIM Response 200 50 50 70 200 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum MODE lt Mode gt This command activates or deactivates the automatic selection of the limit line in the Spectrum Emission Mask measurement Suffix lt n gt lt k gt Parameters lt Mode gt Example 1 4 window irrelevant AUTO MANUAL AUTO The limit line depends on the measured channel power MANUAL One of the three specified limit lines is set The selection is made with the chapter 8 2 6 3 CALCulate LIMit ESPectrum subsys tem on page 143 command RST AUTO CALC LIM ESP MODE AUTO Activates automatic selection of the limit line CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum PCLass lt Class gt EXCLusive lt State gt This command sets the power classes used in the spectrum emission mask measure ment It is only possible to use power classes for which limits are defined Also either only one power class at a time or all power classes together can be selected Suffix lt n gt lt k gt lt Class gt Parameters lt State gt Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 irrelevant ir
146. ault This keyword is used to reset the parameter to its default value e UP This keyword increments the parameter value e DOWN This keyword decrements the parameter value The numeric values associated to MAXimum MINimum DEFault can be queried by add ing the corresponding keywords to the command They must be entered following the quotation mark Example SENSe FREQuency CENTer MAXimum Returns the maximum possible numeric value of the center frequency as result lt arbitrary block program data gt This keyword is provided for commands the parameters of which consist of a binary data block 8 2 CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 The CALCulate subsystem contains commands for converting instrument data trans forming and carrying out corrections These functions are carried out subsequent to data acquisition i e following the SENSe subsystem Note that most commands in the CALCulate subsystem are identical to the base unit only the commands specific to this option are described here 8 2 1 CALCulate lt n gt CDPower subsystem ceeeeeeeeeeeeeenee tees eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeteeeaaeees 107 8 2 2 CALCulate FEED subsvsiem etre eeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeteeeaaeeeeeteeeaaaees 108 8 2 3 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit ACPower Gubevstem ie cecceceieeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeteeeaeees 110 Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 106 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 D
147. ceeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeteeeaee F l Spam NEE IF Power Retrigger Holdoff remote control IF Power Retrigger Hysteresis remote control Input AC DC visiera 63 73 91 101 Input AC DC remote control 0 eeeeeeeeeeee 201 Input 50 O 75 Q os S IQ Capture Settings 0 eee ee eeeeeeeneees Marker 1 2 8 4 vieirai Marker 1 to 4 remote control Marker to Trace remote control eeee ccce 121 Max Hol WEE Mech Atten Auto get Mech Atten Auto remote control c cceeeeeees 201 Mech Atten Manual ccccccccccccceceeeceeeeeeeeeeees 62 88 Mech Atten Manual remote control Min HOA ME Preamp On Off e cece cee eee eeeneeeeeeees Preamp On Off remote control 206 ReTLOVEl E 41 61 85 Ref Level remote control cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 198 Res BW Auto vie D Res BW Manual scissioni die RF Atten Auto cc scccccstccsssscasccscstanioniecesaacsesstesesseees RF Atten Auto remote control RF Atten Manual ccc eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees RF Atten Manual remote control 11seeieseeeee 200 Save remote control as Select 1 2 3 4 remote control a se cece 122 Single Meas remote control ceeeeeeeeeeees 211 Single SWEEP E 64 98 Index Single Sweep remote Control seesse ceecee 211 SWECD E 94 99 Sweep Count remote control Sweep Time remote control
148. ciated channel is marked If the code corresponds to an unused channel only the code entered is marked Example Enter 20 Code 20 is marked at spreading factor 512 if there is no active channel on this code If for instance channel 5 is active at spreading factor 128 the entire channel 5 is marked If the entered code corresponds to an active channel the entire associated channel is marked If it corresponds to a gap between the channels only the entered code is marked If the code number is modified using the rotary knob the red marking changes its position in the diagram only if the code number no longer belongs to the marked channel The step width of the changed rotary knob position refers to a spreading factor of 512 Remote command S ENSe CDPower CODE on page 160 Select Slot Select Channel Selects the slot for evaluation This affects the following result diagrams see also chap ter 6 2 Measurements and Result Diagrams on page 25 Code Domain Power Peak Code Domain Error Result Summary Composite Constellation Code Domain Error Power Channel Table Power vs Symbol Symbol Const Symbol EVM Bitstream Remote command Ss ENSe CDPower SLOT on page 166 Select Branch Switches between the evaluation of the and the Q branch Remote command CALCulate lt n gt CDPower Mapping on page 107 Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 50 R amp S FSV K73 Configuration of 36PP FDD UE Measur
149. cs SCALe X RANGe lt Value gt This command defines the level range for the x axis of the measurement diagram The setting is identical to the level range setting defined with the DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe command Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt Value gt 10dB to 200dB RST 100dB Example CALC STAT SCAL X RANG 20dB CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe X RLEVel lt Value gt This command defines the reference level for the x axis of the measurement diagram The setting is identical to the reference level setting using the DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt SCALe RLEVel command With the reference level offset lt gt 0 the indicated value range of the reference level is modified by the offset The unit depends on the setting performed with CALCulate lt n gt UNIT POWer Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 151 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Parameters lt Value gt 120dBm to 20dBm RST 20dBm Example CALC STAT SCAL X RLEV 60dBm CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe Y LOWer lt Value gt This command defines the lower limit for the y axis of the diagram in statistical meas urements Since probabilities are specified on the y axis the entered numeric values are dimensionless Suffix lt n gt selects the screen Parameters lt Value gt 1E 9 to
150. d display configuration You can retrieve previously stored display configurations and thus easily switch between different displays of measurement results 1 Select the Predefined tab in the Display Configuration dialog box The previously stored and default configurations are listed The current configuration is displayed at the top of the dialog box 2 Select the required set of screen configurations 3 Press Apply To store the current display configuration You can store the current display configuration in the list of predefined settings in order to switch back to it later 1 Select the current display configuration at the top of the Display Configuration dialog box Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 37 R amp S FSV K73 Configuration of 3GPP FDD UE Measurements a es a Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 2 Click Add The current display configuration is added to the list of predefined settings To remove a predefined display configuration You can remove one of the stored display configurations 1 Select the display configuration to be removed from the Predefined tab of the Display Configuration dialog box 2 Click Remove The selected display configuration is removed from the list of predefined settings To restore the default display configurations You can restore the default set of predefined display configurations gt Inthe Predefined tab of the Display Configuration d
151. d upper second alternate adjacent channel to 35 dBm Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 140 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ALTernate lt channel gt RELative lt LowerLimit gt lt UpperLimit gt This command defines the limit for the alternate adjacent channels for adjacent channel power measurements The reference value for the relative limit value is the measured channel power Note that the relative limit value has no effect on the limit check as soon as it is below the absolute limit defined with CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ALTernate lt Channel gt ABSolute This mechanism allows automatic checking of the absolute basic values of adjacent channel power as defined in mobile radio standards Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt k gt irrelevant lt Channel gt 1 11 the alternate channel Parameters lt LowerLimit gt first value O to 100dB limit for the lower and the upper alternate lt UpperLimit gt adjacent channel RST 0 DB Example CALC LIM ACP ALT2 30DB 30DB Sets the relative limit value for the power in the lower and upper second alternate adjacent channel to 30 dB below the channel power CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ALTernate lt Channel gt RELative STATe lt State gt This command activates the limit check for the alternate adjacent channels for a
152. dB Other entries are rounded to the next lower integer value If the defined reference level cannot be set for the given RF attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is output Parameters lt Attenuation gt 0 25 RST 0 dB OFF Example INP1 EATT 10 dB Mode all Manual operation See El Atten Mode Auto Man on page 63 INPut EATT AUTO lt State gt This command switches the automatic behaviour of the electronic attenuator on or off If activated electronic attenuation is used to reduce the operation of the mechanical attenu ation whenever possible This command is only available with option R amp S FSV B25 but not if R amp S FSV B17 is active Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 205 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 DEE Other Commands Referenced in this Manual Example INP1 EATT AUTO OFF Mode all Manual operation See El Atten On Off on page 62 See El Atten Mode Auto Man on page 63 INPut EATT STATe lt State gt This command turns the electronic attenuator on or off This command is only available with option R amp S FSV B25 but not if R amp S FSV B17 is active Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example INP EATT STAT ON Switches the electronic attenuator into the signal path INPut GAIN STATe lt State gt This command turns the 20 dB prea
153. data section starts with the keyword Trace lt n gt lt n gt number of stored trace followed by the measured data in one or several columns depending on measurement which are also separated by a semicolon File contents header and data section Type FSV Description Instrument model Version 1 50 Firmware version Date 01 Apr 2010 Date of data set storage Screen A Instrument mode Points per Symbol 4 Points per symbol x Axis Start 13 sym Start value of the x axis x Axis Stop 135 sym Stop value of the x axis Ref value y axis 10 00 dBm Y axis reference value Ref value position 100 Y axis reference position Demodulator Offset QPSK Trace 1 Trace number Meas Result Result type Meas Signal Magnitude Result display Demodulation type ResultMode Trace Result mode x unit sym Unit of the x axis y unit dBm Unit of the y axis Trace Mode Clear Write Trace mode Values 592 Number of results lt values gt List of results Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 33 R amp S FSV K73 Configuration of 3GPP FDD UE Measurements H 7 1 7 1 1 7 1 2 7 1 3 7 1 4 Configuration of 3GPP FDD UE Measure ments The R amp S FSV K73 option appears in the Select Mode menu MODE key as 3GPP FDD UE This softkey can be used to start the R amp S FSV K73 options The most impo
154. defined limit lines for the Spectrum Emission Mask measurement All modifications made to the predefined limit lines are lost and the factory set values are restored Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 146 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 El CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window lt k gt irrelevant Example CALC LIM ESP REST Resets the limit lines for the Spectrum Emission Mask to the default setting CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum VALue lt Power gt This command activates the manual limit line selection and specifies the expected power as a value Depending on the entered value one of the predefined limit lines is selected Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window lt k gt irrelevant Parameters lt Power gt 33 28 0 33 P 33 28 28 lt P lt 33 0 P lt 28 RST 0 Example CALC LIM ESP VAL 33 Activates manual selection of the limit line and selects the limit line for P 33 8 2 6 4 CALCulate PSE subsystem CAL Culate nzPDEAksearchlbpGtarchtlMMediatel er neoeornsnrnnerenorsrennrene 147 CAL Culate nzPDEAksearchlbGtarch AUTO 148 CAL Culate nzPDEAksearchlbpGtarch MAI 148 CALCulate lt n gt PEAKsearch PSEarchiPSHOW cccsciceceseecsendaccudecasssaeadaccececenavanancecdaasanees 148 CAL Culate nzPDEAksearchlbGtarch GUlDbanges tr trorornsrrererorornrenene 149 CALCulate lt n gt PEAKsearch PSEarch IMMedia
155. ding factor 128 20 values Spreading factor 64 40 values Spreading factor 32 80 values Spreading factor 16 160 values Spreading factor 8 320 values Spreading factor 4 640 values BITSTREAM The bitstream of one slot is transferred One value is transferred per bit range 0 1 The number of symbols is not constant and may vary for each sweep Specific symbols in the bitstream may be invalid depending on the channel type and the bit rate symbols without power The assigned invalid bits are marked by 9 EVM VS CHIP The square root of square difference between received signal and reference signal for each chip are transferred The values are normalized to the square root of the average power at the selected slot Output List of 2560 vector error values of all chips at the selected slot MAGNITUDE ERROR VS CHIP Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 193 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 TRACe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 The magnitude difference between received signal and reference signal for each chip are transferred The values are normalized to the square root of the average power at the selected slot Output List of 2560 vector error values of all chips at the selected slot PHASE ERROR VS CHIP The phase differences between received signal and reference signal for each chip are transferred The values are normalized to the square root of the average power at the selected slot Ou
156. ding if the corresponding window is a full screen a split screen or a quarter screen window The full screen display mode shows the same results as the split screen window but with a bigger font In the quarter screen window only the most important results are displayed on the screen The frame number and the slot number are always displayed in the Global Results header It indicates the slot for which the measurement is performed The entry is only valid if one frame of the 3GPP signal is analyzed The analysis is performed either on a complete slot or a half slot Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 55 R amp S FSV K73 Deeg Table 7 1 Global Results Configuration of 3GPP FDD UE Measurements Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 Total Power Chip Rate Error Displays the total signal power average power of total evaluated 3GPP FDD UE slot Displays the chip rate error in the frame to analyze in ppm As a result of a high chip rate error symbol errors arise and the CDP measurement is possibly not synchronized to the 3GPP FDD UE signal The result is valid even if the synchronization of the analyzer and signal failed IQ Offs Imbalance DC offset and IQ imbalance of the signal in the selected slot in Composite EVM Rho No of Active Chan Composite EVM The difference between the test signal and the ideal reference signal in the selected slot see Composite EVM RMS on page 52 Rho Quality p
157. ding to the code classes i e the unassigned channels are transmitted last Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 191 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 TRACe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 CODE DOMAIN ERROR POWER Five values are transmitted for each code class 8 channel The channels are sorted according to the code numbers Format lt code class gt 1 lt code number gt 1 lt CDEP gt 1 lt channel flag gt 1 lt code class gt 2 lt code number gt 2 lt CDEP gt 2 lt channel flag gt 2 lt code class gt 256 lt code number gt 256 lt CDEP gt 256 lt channel flag gt 256 where lt Code class gt Highest code class of an uplink signal It is always set to 8 CC8 lt Code number gt Code number of the evaluated CC8 channel lt CDEP gt Code domain error power value of the CC8 channel dB lt Channel flag gt Indicates if the CC8 channel belongs to an assigned code channel e 0b00 0d0 CC8 is inactive e 0b01 0d1 CC8 channel belongs to an active code channel RESULT SUMMARY The following results are returned for each channel lt composite EVM gt lt peak CDE dB gt lt carr freq Error Hz gt lt chip rate error ppm gt lt total power dB gt lt trg to frame s gt lt EVM peak channel gt lt EVM mean channel gt lt class gt lt channel number gt lt power abs channel dB gt lt power rel channel dB referred to the total p
158. djacent channel power measurements Before the command the limit check must be activated using CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower STATe The result can be queried with CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ALTernate lt channel gt RELative Note that a complete measurement must be performed between switching on the limit check and the result query since otherwise no correct results are obtained Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt k gt irrelevant lt Channel gt 1 11 the alternate channel Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 141 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 Example CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 CALC LIM ACP ALT2 30DB 30DB Sets the relative limit value for the power in the lower and upper second alternate adjacent channel to 30 dB below the channel power CALC LIM ACP ALT2 ABS 35DBM 35DBM Sets the absolute limit value for the power in the lower and upper second alternate adjacent channel to 35 dBm CALC LIM ACP ON Switches on globally the limit check for the channel adjacent chan nel measurement CALC LIM ACP ALT2 STAT ON Switches on the check of the relative limit values for the lower and upper second alternate adjacent channel CALC LIM ACP ALT2 ABS STAT ON Switches on the check of absolute limit values for the lower and upper second alternate adjacent channel INIT WA
159. dow is mini mized not closed If you select the File gt Exit menu item in the R amp S DiglConf window the application is closed Note that in this case the settings are lost and the EX IQ BOX functionality is no longer available until you restart the application using the DiglConf softkey in the R amp S FSV once again Remote command Remote commands for the R amp S DiglConf software always begin with SOURce EBOX Such commands are passed on from the R amp S FSV to the R amp S DiglConf automatically which then configures the R amp S EX IQ BOX via the USB connection All remote commands available for configuration via the R amp S DiglConf software are described in the R amp S EX IQ BOX Digital Interface Module R amp S DiglConf Software Operating Manual Example 1 SOURce EBOX RST SOURce EBOX IDN Result Rohde amp Schwarz DigIConf 02 05 436 Build 47 Example 2 SOURce EBOX USER CLOCk REFerence FREQuency 5MHZ Defines the frequency value of the reference clock Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 76 R amp S FSV K73 7 2 7 2 1 7 2 2 7 2 3 7 2 4 7 2 5 7 2 6 7 2 6 1 7 2 6 2 7 2 6 3 7 2 6 4 7 2 6 5 7 2 6 6 7 2 1 7 2 2 Configuration of 3GPP FDD UE Measurements RF Measurements RF Measurements Output Power Measurements EnEn nnn 77 Spectrum Emission Mask isisi oinaan a a a e Aaaa 77 Adjacent Channel Power LACH 78 Occupied Le KL TTT 79 ee RTE 79 Softkeys
160. dth settings If SENSe SWEep TIME is used automatic coupling is switched off Parameters lt State gt Example Manual operation ON OFF RST ON SWE TIME AUTO ON Activates automatic sweep time See Sweeptime Manual on page 84 See Sweeptime Auto on page 94 See Coupling Ratio on page 95 See Default Coupling on page 97 SENSe SWEep TYPE lt Type gt This command selects the sweep type Parameters lt Type gt Example Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 SWE Selects analog frequency sweeps AUTO Automatically selects the sweep type FFT or analog frequency sweep FFT Selects FFT sweeps RST AUTO SWE TYPE FFT Selects FFT sweeps 183 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 Dee STATus QUEStionable subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Manual operation See Sweep Type on page 94 See Sweep on page 94 See FFT on page 94 See Auto on page 95 8 6 STATus QUEStionable subsystem R amp S FSV K73 The STATus subsystem contains the commands for the status reporting system for details refer to the remote control basics in the base unit description RST does not influence the status registers The STATus QUEStionable subsystem contains information about the observance of limits during adjacent power measurements the reference and local oscillator the observance of limit lines and limit margins and possible overloads of the un
161. e Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 CALCulate lt n gt PEAKsearch PSEarch SUBRanges lt NumberPeaks gt This command sets the number of peaks per range that are stored in the list Once the selected number of peaks has been reached the peak search is stopped in the current range and continued in the next range Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt NumberPeaks gt 1 to 50 RST 25 Example CALC PSE SUBR 10 Sets 10 peaks per range to be stored in the list 8 2 6 5 CALCulate STATistics subsystem CAL Culate nz GTATiettce CCDETSTATel nenen en ttet oerrsrrsr nnr eneretororerernsnrnnenene 149 CALC latesn gt STATIstiles NSAMPleS inniinn a a iaia 149 CAL Culatesa gt STATistics PRESEt crinii niiair iaa aaia iaa 150 CAL Culate nzGTATletcebREGultTracez 150 CALCulate lt h gt STATistics SCALEAUTO ONCE E 151 CAL Culate nz GTATlstceGCAlexbhRaNGe inkin nn einion i nnani 151 CAL Culate nz GTATlstceGCAlexvbRlEvel 151 CAL Culate nz GTATlstce GCAlexvLOwWer 152 CALCulatesn STATIsti s SCALEA UNIT anna E a aa esses eat 152 GALGulate lt n gt STATistics SCALE Y UPPE cccccccscccceccctneoneccuedcasssecncdcccaaaacccudccnaececmataenaie 152 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics CCDF STATe lt State gt This command switches on or off the measurement of the complementary cumulative distribution function CCDF On activating this function the APD measurement is switched off Suffix lt n gt
162. e Error wa 55 Deleting 47 Trace Statistics sees eege ed 55 Editing 47 display range Chan Pow Abs 56 eelerer Ea 86 87 Chan Power Rel be OT Display range Chan Type S E T 58 Frequency Characters DPCCH oonan Ee E DPDCH ooeccccccccccccccecccesececccscccecce sesesesesesssuresesseisetsttseeress chip rate error Clear Write trace mode Code Power Displ EE 48 Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 222 R amp S FSV K73 Index E Electronic input attenuation RE 205 Eliminate Tail Chips E EE 48 lee DiglConf export format external NOISE source o oo eee cece cece cette teeneeeeeeeee 73 101 F FFT Filter Mode UE PEET ETEA Narrow SOMKEY ciarn aaa ERE Filters RUE 31 Selecting WEE 30 HIE 30 Filter types Dee wont cas fccvcicedensievandenschesscaet raaire riranna 30 EMI 6AB EE 30 Normal 3dB i RRO rrp eet erdeelt Frame Tov Analyze norimist avian ada 42 frequency IEN 40 60 83 TEE 83 SOP aie ciate EE 83 Frequency COMED ronisin Frequency menu Frontend settings Full Scale Level Digital Baseband IQ remote control 0 0 203 Digital UO Interface remote control ee 203 Digital Q KE 74 f l SCEN ME 55 H Hysteresis Lower Auto level Upper Auto level l IEC IEEE bus Command description esseseeeieeseeieerrerrrerrerrerreeee 104 Impedance NaNe i AEEA EE P TAT 91 Inactive Channel Threshold esseeseeeereeeerrrrrerrr
163. e frozen and displayed Note If a trace is frozen the instrument settings apart from level range and reference level see below can be changed without impact on the displayed trace The fact that the displayed trace no longer matches the current instrument setting is indicated by the icon on the tab label If the level range or reference level is changed the R amp S FSV automatically adapts the measured data to the changed display range This allows an amplitude zoom to be made after the measurement in order to show details of the trace Remote command DISP TRAC MODE VIEW see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 195 Blank Hides the selected trace Remote command DISP TRAC OFF see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe on page 196 6 3 5 Selecting the Appropriate Filter Type All resolution bandwidths are realized with digital filters The video filters are responsible for smoothing the displayed trace Using video band widths that are small compared to the resolution bandwidth only the signal average is displayed and noise peaks and pulsed signals are repressed If pulsed signals are to be measured it is advisable to use a video bandwidth that is large compared to the resolution bandwidth VBW 10 x RBW for the amplitudes of pulses to be measured correctly The following filter types are available e Normal 3dB Gaussian filters Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 3
164. e next smaller trace maximum If no next smaller maximum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC MARK2 MAX NEXT Positions marker 2 to the next lower maximum value Usage Event Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 117 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Manual operation See Next Peak on page 70 See Next Peak Mode on page 70 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum PEAK This command positions the marker on the current trace maximum The corresponding marker is activated first or switched to the marker mode If no maximum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt depends on mode Selects the marker Example CALC MARK2 MAX Positions marker 2 to the maximum value of the trace Usage Event Manual operation See Peak on page 70 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt This command positions a marker to the next smaller trace maximum on the right of the current value i e in ascending X values If no next smaller maximum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excur
165. e the stop frequency The following range of values for the stop frequency is allowed fmin T SPanmin s Fstop s fmax f min f max ANd Spanmin are specified in the data sheet Remote command SENSe FREQuency STOP on page 181 Frequency Offset Opens an edit dialog box to enter a frequency offset that shifts the displayed frequency range by the specified offset The softkey indicates the current frequency offset The allowed values range from 100 GHz to 100 GHz The default setting is 0 Hz Remote command SENSe FREQuency OFFSet on page 180 Softkeys of the Span Menu for RF Measurements The following chapter describes all softkeys available in the Span menu for RF meas urements except for Power measurements Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 83 R amp S FSV K73 Configuration of 3GPP FDD UE Measurements RF Measurements Span OT 84 ee E En TEE 84 Full SA EE 84 Last Span aeinn ia inaa ia tence aana aana a aiaa aa aaa a aiaa aiaa 85 Span Manual Opens an edit dialog box to enter the frequency span The center frequency remains the same when you change the span The following range is allowed span 0 0 Hz span gt 0 SpaNmin f span f max fmax and SpanNmin are specified in the data sheet Remote command SENSe FREQuency SPAN on page 181 Sweeptime Manual Opens an edit dialog box to enter the sweep time Sweep time absolute max sweep time value
166. eeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeesiaeeeeeeeeeeaas 159 SENSe POWer Subsystem cece eceeeee erect eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaeeeeeeeeinaeeeeeeeeaas 167 Other SENSe Commands Referenced in this Manual 173 STATus QUEStionable subsystem R amp S FSV K73 c sccccsseeeeeeeceeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeees 184 STATus QUEStionable SYNC subsystem R amp S FGVKOOL 184 Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 103 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 Notation 8 7 TRACe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 cccscccssseecsscceessceesssseseeseeessseseesseeesssseaeeseaeeess 185 8 8 Other Commands Referenced in this Manual ccccssseeeeceseeeeseeeeeeeenseeseeeeeees 195 8 8 1 DISPlay gbevetem eceNEEESEEEREENEEREEEEEEENNEEEEEEEEENNEEEESER ENNER SSES 195 8 8 2 INPUut SUBSYSTEM ccrann EEEE NEEN EES 200 8 8 3 TIRIGger SUbSYStOM e eEEAEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEERNEEEEEENEEEEEENEEEEEN ENNEN 207 8 8 4 Other Referenced Commande 210 8 1 Notation In the following sections all commands implemented in the instrument are first listed and then described in detail arranged according to the command subsystems The notation is adapted to the SCPI standard The SCPI conformity information is included in the indi vidual description of the commands Individual Description The individual description contains the complete notation of the command An example for each command the RST value and the SCPI information are included as well The options
167. eeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeesseeseeesseeseaneeeees 5 1 2 Conventions Used in the Documentation 2 c eeceeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesneaneeeees 7 1 3 How to Use the Help System ccceesccceeceseeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeseeeseeeeseeasseeeeseeeseeeeseenseeeeesaes 8 2 MATE OCU TON EE 10 3 Measurement Examples RASESV KILL een 11 3 1 Measurement 1 Measurement of the Signal Channel Powetl cccsssssssseeeeereees 12 3 2 Measurement 2 Measurement of the Spectrum Emission Mask 0001 0 13 3 3 Measurement 3 Measurement of the Relative Code Domain Power 14 3 4 Measurement 4 Triggered Measurement of Relative Code Domain Power 16 3 5 Measurement 5 Measurement of the Composite EVM cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 17 3 6 Measurement 6 Measurement of Peak Code Domain Error een 18 4 Setup for User Equipment Tests cc sssceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 20 5 3GPP FDD UE Test MOG 6 siiicccceccscsietccctescnt cxevedecasenesioteentneneceasadneaients 22 6 Instrument Functions 3GPP User Equipment Measurements 24 6 1 Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 24 6 2 Measurements and Result Diagrams cccccccssssssseeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeneeeseeeeenes 25 6 3 Further Information cssiesis lt ccccclstc ENEE ebe detested A eit Ree heeded 26 7 Configuration of 3GPP FDD UE Measuremente
168. el 43 65 Trigger OTS Cle ic egeeeen d e Erde 43 66 Trigger Source External GEI 43 65 Trigger Source Free Run GEI 43 65 trigger to rame sasarina ennea a eaea ioe 56 TX Settings EXIJO BOX ee aeni taaria Ea OEGES 75 Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 226 U Upper case commands nsssneeeseeieesetinneeennrnneeeee ee 105 Upper Level Hysteresis Ge 72 V VBW RMS G6teCton cranii iniaa Video bandwidth View trace EE Z Zoom PATNI AS scssi sense cds santa pedi acka aia ies 30 67
169. ements a SSS SS SS a a eS Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 7 1 3 Measurement Modes in Code Domain Analyzer The display modes in this chapter are all based on the recording of the Q Data With the same dataset of the recorded signal we can calculate the following display modes Therefore it is not necessary to restart the measurement to switch the display mode The following display modes and measurements specified by the 3GPP standard are available Code Domain POWER EE 51 Composite EVM RMS Jonna E NR E dE SCENE 52 Peak Code Domain Error 52 EVM YS CPD EE 52 Mag Error vS e TEE 53 Phase Emor yS E 54 enee ee E Een DT 54 POWE VS SJON EEN 54 SV MMION PON MUU E EE 55 Symbol Phase EE 55 Rosul SUMINA E 55 Code Domain Error EE 57 Ghannel NEE 57 POWGE E 59 Symbol Constela EE 59 Symbol EVM EE 59 Eeer eege 59 Freg Err VS Sol en ia a ad a ed 59 Phase Discontinuity vS SIl oecrrerccoinaniiini ceni a RA 60 Code Domain Power Start Ch 0 Stop Ch 511 Fig 7 1 Code Domain Power Display for R amp S FSV K73 The Code Domain Power display mode shows the power of the different code channels in the the adjusted slot Due to the circumstance that the power is regulated from slot to slot the result power may differ between different slots Detected channels are painted yellow The channel which is adjusted via Select Channel is marked red The codes where no channel could be detected are painted cyan Operating Manual 1176 7590 0
170. ending on the selected mobile radio standard weighting filters with characteristic or very steep sided channel filters are used for band limitation Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example POW HSP ON SENSe POWer NCORrection lt Mode gt This command turns noise cancellation on and off If noise cancellation is on the R amp S FSV performs a reference measurement to determine its inherent noise and subtracts the result from the channel power measurement result first active trace only The inherent noise of the instrument depends on the selected center frequency resolu tion bandwidth and level setting Therefore the correction function is disabled whenever one of these parameters is changed A corresponding message is displayed on the screen Noise correction must be turned on again manually after the change Parameters lt Mode gt ON Performs noise correction OFF Performs no noise correction AUTO Performs noise correction After a parameter change noise correction is restarted automati cally and a new correction measurement is performed RST OFF Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 172 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 8 5 3 SENSe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Example POW NCOR ON Manual operation See Noise Correction on page 90 Other SENSe Commands Referenced in this Manual SENSe JADJust ALL This command determines the ideal frequency and level co
171. ent channel power measurement Adjacent Channel Power in the selected measurement window It should be noted that the absolute limit value has no effect on the limit check as soon as it is below the relative limit value defined with CALC LIM ACP ACH REL This mech anism allows automatic checking of the absolute basic values of adjacent channel power as defined in mobile radio standards Suffix lt n gt n irrelevant Parameters RST 200DBM The first value is the limit for the lower and the upper adjacent channel The second limit value is ignored but must be indicated for reasons of compatibility with the FSE family Example CALC LIM ACP ACH ABS 35DBM 35DBM Sets the absolute limit value in for the power in the lower and upper adjacent channel to 35 dBm Mode WCDMA Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 112 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 DEENEN CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit1 ACPower ACHannel ABSolute STATe lt State gt This command activates the limit check for the adjacent channel when adjacent channel power measurement Adjacent Channel Power is performed Before the command the limit check for the channel adjacent channel measurement must be globally switched on using CALC LIM ACP ON The result can be queried with CALC LIM ACP ACH RES It should be noted that a complete measurement must be performed between switching on the
172. ep Count softkey without deleting the trace of the last measurement This is particularly of interest when using the trace configurations Average or Max Hold to take previously recorded measurements into account for averaging maximum search Remote command INITiate lt n gt CONMeas on page 211 Sweeptime Manual Opens an edit dialog box to enter the sweep time Sweep time absolute max sweep time value 16000 s absolute min sweep time value zero span 1 us span gt 0 depends on device model refer to data sheet Allowed values depend on the ratio of span to RBW and RBW to VBW For details refer to the data sheet Numeric input is always rounded to the nearest possible sweep time For rotary knob or UPARROW DNARROW key inputs the sweep time is adjusted in steps either down wards or upwards The manual input mode of the sweep time is indicated by a green bullet next to the SWT display in the channel bar If the selected sweep time is too short for the selected band width and span level measurement errors will occur due to a too short settling time for the resolution or video filters In this case the R amp S FSV displays the error message UNCAL and marks the indicated sweep time with a red bullet Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 98 R amp S FSV K73 Configuration of 3GPP FDD UE Measurements REENERT RF Measurements This softkey is available for RF measurements but not for CCDF measuremen
173. er 8 2 CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 on page 106 e DISPlay subsystem e FORMat subsystem e INITiate subsystem e INPut subsystem e MMEM subsystem e OUTput subsystem e SENSe subsystem except for the specific commands described in chapter 8 5 SENSe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 on page 159 e TRIGger subsystem NOC AGI ONG scccccectsscccectseccceaceeseescegecapsscceneasneacitaeeeesaccteceedesscesieeusstececstsatcansacdsacuenseessszcentas 104 CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 cecceeseeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeessecceeseeeeeeeeeseeeees 106 CALCulate lt n gt CDPower subsystem ececceeeeeeeenee teeter eeeceeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeneeaas 107 CALCulate FEED SUDSYStOM 00 eee ccceeee eee eeene eee eee e eee eee sete eaaaeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeeaas 108 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit ACPower Gubsvsiem 110 CALCulate MARKer subsvstem eee eeecne tees eee eaaeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeetiaeeeeeeeeeaas 116 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer FUNCTION subsvstem ce eeceeeee cree ettteeeeeeeeeetaeeeeeeeeeeaaas 123 Other CALCulate Commands Referenced in this Manual 128 CONFigure WCDPower subsystem R amp S FSV K73 ccccsseeeceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeees 153 INSTrument SUDSYStOM ec seeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeneneeeeeeeseeseeseneeseeeneseeeeseeeuesseeeeeenneseeeeeeens 158 SENSe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 c cccceeceecsseeeeeeeeeeseceeeeeeeseeseeeeeseseeeeeeeeeesseeeeneeee 159 SENSe CDPower Gubesvstem eee eeccneeeeeeeeeiciee
174. erage or Max Hold to take previously recorded measurements into account for averaging maximum search Remote command INITiate lt n gt CONMeas on page 211 Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 64 R amp S FSV K73 Configuration of 3GPP FDD UE Measurements Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 Sweep Count Opens an edit dialog box to enter the number of sweeps to be performed in the single sweep mode Values from 0 to 32767 are allowed If the values 0 or 1 are set one sweep is performed The sweep count is applied to all the traces in a diagram If the trace configurations Average Max Hold or Min Hold are set the sweep count value also determines the number of averaging or maximum search procedures In continuous sweep mode if sweep count 0 default averaging is performed over 10 sweeps For sweep count 1 no averaging maxhold or minhold operations are per formed Remote command SENSe SWEep COUNt on page 181 Softkeys of the Trigger Menu TRIG key R amp S FSV K73 The TRIG key opens the following submenu The following softkey functions are available for CDA measurements For RF measurements see the description for the base unit Tagger Source EE 65 Trigger Source Extemal seed ENNEN ENEE dee EERE KAE 65 Kr Tee e EE 65 MG GSR OR DEn a T cocteesivaheedey Abadd R 66 Trigger Source Free Run The start of a sweep is not triggered Once a measurement is completed another is started
175. erformed without external triggering a section of approximately 20 ms of the test signal is recorded at an arbitrary moment to detect the start of a3GPP FDD UE frame in this section Depending on the position of the frame start the required computing time can be quite long Applying an external frame trigger can reduce the computing time 1 Test setup a Connect the RF output of the R amp S SMU to the input of the R amp S FSV b Connect the reference input EXT REF IN OUT on the rear panel of the R amp S FSV to the reference input REF on the rear panel of the R amp S SMU coaxial cable with BNC connectors c Connect the external trigger input on the rear panel of the R amp S FSV EXT TRIG GATE to the external trigger output on the rear panel of the R amp S SMU TRIG OUT1 of PAR DATA 2 Settings on the R amp S SMU See chapter 3 3 Measurement 3 Measurement of the Relative Code Domain Power on page 14 3 Settings on the R amp S FSV See chapter 3 3 Measurement 3 Measurement of the Relative Code Domain Power on page 14 In addition TRIG EXTERN 4 Measurement on the R amp S FSV The following is displayed e Screen A Code domain power of signal channel configuration with 3 data channels on Q branch e Screen B Numeric results of CDP measurement e Trigger to Frame Offset between trigger event and start of 3GPP FDD UE frame The repetition rate of the measurement increases considerably compared to the repetit
176. es the adjacent channel power measurement with defined settings in the analyzer mode chapter 7 2 2 Spectrum Emission Mask on page 77 Compares the signal power in different carrier offset ranges with the maximum values specified by 3GPP chapter 7 2 4 Occupied Bandwidth on page 79 Activates the measurement of the occupied bandwidth analyzer mode chapter 7 2 5 CCDF Evaluates the signal with regard to its statistical characteristics distribution func on page 79 tion of the signal amplitudes Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 ccecseceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeneeesseeeeseseeeeeeeeees 35 Display CONCEP cniras cus dloveddas coedovedaensasganndinisueduaduanannecdadadsanrentilacceuandeawacannnmes 35 Softkeys of the Code Domain Analyzer Menu R amp S FSV K73 cccceeeeeeeeeeeenteeee 38 Measurement Modes in Code Domain Anahyzer 51 Softkeys of the Frequency Menu FREQ key R amp S EGV KOOL 60 34 Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 R amp S FSV K73 Configuration of 3GPP FDD UE Measurements 7 1 5 7 1 6 7 1 7 7 1 8 7 1 9 7 1 10 7 1 11 7 1 12 7 2 7 2 1 7 2 2 7 2 3 7 2 4 7 2 5 7 2 6 7 1 Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 Softkeys of the Amplitude Menu AMPT key R amp S FSV K73 0 cececeeeeeenteeeeeeeneee 61 Softkeys of the Sweep Menu SWEEP key R amp S FSV K73 0 ee ceeeeeeeeeenteeeeeeeenaes 64 Softkeys of the Trigger Menu TRI
177. est Descewing Done Close For details see Interface Status Information in Instrument Functions R amp S Digital 1 Q Interface Option R amp S FSV B17 in the description of the base unit Remote command INPut DIQ CDEVice on page 201 EXIQ Opens a configuration dialog box for an optionally connected R amp S EX IQ BOX and a submenu to access the main settings quickly Note The EX IQ Box functionality is not supported for R amp S FSV models 1321 3008Kxx If the optional R amp S DiglConf software is installed the submenu consists only of one key to access the software Note that R amp S DiglConf requires a USB connection not LAN from the R amp S FSV to the R amp S EX IQ BOX in addition to the R amp S Digital UO Interface connection R amp S DiglConf version 2 10 or higher is required For typical applications of the R amp S EX IQ BOX see also the description of the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 in the base unit manual For details on configuration see the R amp S Ex UO Box External Signal Interface Module Manual For details on installation and operation of the R amp S DiglConf software see the R amp S EX IQ BOX Digital Interface Module R amp S DigIConf Software Operating Manual TX Settings EXIQ Opens the EX IQ BOX Settings dialog box to configure the R amp S FSV for digital output to a connected device Transmitter Type Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 75 R amp S FSV K73 C
178. esults of the error vector magnitude measurement The measurement provides information on the EVM of the channel marked red in the CDP diagram in the slot marked red of the power versus slot diagram at the symbol level RCDE Relative Code Domain Error for the complete frame of the selected channel Remote command CALC FEED XTIM CDP ERR SUMM see chapter 8 2 2 CALCulate FEED subsys tem on page 108 Query of results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion WCDPower MS RESult on page 126 Code Domain Error Power Code Domain Error Power is the difference in power between the measured and his ideal signal The unit is dB There are no other units for the y axis Remote command CALC FEED XTIM CDP ERR PCD see chapter 8 2 2 CALCulate FEED subsys tem on page 108 sa Channel Table The Code Domain Channel Table display mode shows the channel assignment table The channel assignment table can contain a maximum of 512 entries corresponding to the 256 codes that can be assigned within the class of spreading factor 256 both and Q components The upper part of the table indicates the DPCCH channel that has to be present in every signal to be analyzed Furthermore there are additional control channels used in HSDPA and HSUPA signals These channels HSDPCCH and EDPCCH are also displayed in the upper part of the table The lower part of the table indicates the data chan
179. eveling can be defined using the Settings softkey Remote command SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 174 Auto Scrambling Code This softkey starts a calculation on the recorded signal with all scrambling codes The scrambling code that leads to the highest signal power is chosen as the new scrambling code Remote command SENSe CDPower LCODe SEARch IMMediate on page 163 Settings Opens a submenu to define settings for automatic leveling Possible settings are e Meas Time Manual on page 72 e Meas Time Auto on page 72 Meas Time Manual lt Settings Opens an edit dialog box to enter the duration of the level measurement in seconds The level measurement is used to determine the optimal reference level automatically see the Auto Level softkey Auto Level on page 72 The default value is 1 ms Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure LEVel DURation on page 174 Meas Time Auto lt Settings The level measurement is used to determine the optimal reference level automatically see the Auto Level softkey This softkey resets the level measurement duration for automatic leveling to the default value of 100 ms Upper Level Hysteresis Settings Defines an upper threshold the signal must exceed before the reference level is auto matically adjusted when the Auto Level function is performed Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFiguration HYSTeresis UPPer on page 173 Operating Manual 117
180. formation on filters refer to chapter 6 3 6 List of Available RRC and Channel Filters on page 31 Parameters lt Bandwidth gt 100 Hz to 40 GHz RST 14 kHz Example POW ACH BWID CHAN2 30 kHz Sets the bandwidth of the TX channel 2 to 30 kHz Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 167 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 EE SENSe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth ACHannel lt Bandwidth gt This command defines the channel bandwidth of the adjacent channel of the radio trans mission system If the bandwidth of the adjacent channel is changed the bandwidths of all alternate adjacent channels are automatically set to the same value With SENSe lt source gt POWer HSPeed set to ON steep edged channel filters are available For further information on filters refer to chapter 6 3 6 List of Available RRC and Channel Filters on page 31 Parameters lt Bandwidth gt 100 Hz to 40 GHz RST 14 kHz Example POW ACH BWID ACH 30 kHz Sets the bandwidth of all adjacent channels to 30 kHz SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth ALTernate lt channel gt lt Bandwidth gt This command defines the channel bandwidth of the specified alternate adjacent chan nels of the radio transmission system If the channel bandwidth of one alternate adjacent channel is changed e g channel 3 the bandwidth of all subsequent alternate adjacent channels e g 4 11 is automatica
181. g Manual 1176 7590 02 01 20 R amp S FSV K73 Setup for User Equipment Tests e For signal measurements at the output of two port networks connect the reference frequency of the signal source to the rear reference input of the analyzer EXT REF IN OUT e To ensure that the error limits specified by the 3GPP standard are met the analyzer should use an external reference frequency for frequency measurements on user equipment For instance a rubidium frequency standard may be used as a reference source e If the user equipment is provided with a trigger output connect this output to the rear trigger input of the analyzer EXT TRIG GATE Presetting e Enter external attenuation REF LVL OFFSET e Enter reference level e Enter center frequency e Set the trigger e Select standard and measurement Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 21 R amp S FSV K73 3GPP FDD UE Test Models 5 3GPP FDD UE Test Models The possible channel configurations for the mobile station signal are limited by 3GPP Only two different configurations for data channels DPDCH are permissible according to the specification In addition to these two channel configurations the HS DPCCH channel can be transmitted to operate the mobile station in HSDPA mode Thus the R amp S FSV K73 checks for these channel configurations only during the automatic channel search Therefore channels whose parameters do not correspond to one of these configurations are not a
182. gt irrelevant Parameters lt LowerLimit gt O to 100dB the value for the lower limit must be lower than the lt UpperLimit gt value for the upper limit RST 0 dB Example CALC LIM ACP ACH 30DB 30DB Sets the relative limit value for the power in the lower and upper adjacent channel to 30 dB below the channel power CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel RESult This command queries the result of the limit check for the upper lower adjacent channel when adjacent channel power measurement is performed Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 138 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 If the power measurement of the adjacent channel is switched off the command produces a query error Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt k gt irrelevant Return values Result The result is returned in the form lt result gt lt result gt where lt result gt PASSED FAILED and where the first returned value denotes the lower the second denotes the upper adjacent channel Example CALC LIM ACP ACH 30DB 30DB Sets the relative limit value for the power in the lower and upper adjacent channel to 30 dB below the channel power CALC LIM ACP ACH ABS 35DBM 35DBM Sets the absolute limit value for the power in the lower and upper adjacent channel to 35 dB CALC LIM ACP ON Switches on globally the limit check for the channel adjacent chan nel mea
183. hannel Channels below the specified threshold are regarded as inactive Parameters lt ThresholdLevel gt Range 100 dB to 0 dB RST 60 dB Example CDP ICT 50 Sets the Inactice Channel Threshold to 50 dB Mode CDMA EVDO TDS WCDMA SENSe CDPower IQLength lt CaptureLength gt This command specifies the number of frames that are captured by one sweep Parameters lt CaptureLength gt Range 1 to 100 RST 1 Example SENS CDP IQLength 3 Mode WCDMA Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 162 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 EE SENSe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Manual operation See IQ Capture Settings on page 41 See Capture Length on page 43 SENSe CDPower LCODe TYPE lt Type gt This command switches between long and short scrambling code Parameters lt Type gt LONG SHORt RST LONG Example CDP LCOD TYPE SHOR Mode WCDMA Manual operation See Sync Scrambling Settings on page 44 See Type on page 44 SENSe CDPower LCODe SEARch IMMediate This command automatically searches for the scrambling codes that lead to the highest signal power The code with the highest power is stored as the new scrambling code for further measurements Searching requires that the correct center frequency and level are set The scrambling code search can automatically determine the primary scrambling code number The sec ondary scrambling code number is expected as 0
184. he filter mode of FFT filters by defining the partial span size The partial span is the span which is covered by one FFT analysis This command is only available for sweep type FFT Parameters lt FilterMode gt AUTO The firmware determines whether to use wide or narrow filters to obtain the best measurement results NARRow The FFT filters with the smaller partial span are used This allows you to perform measurements near a carrier with a reduced ref erence level due to a narrower analog prefilter RST AUTO Example BAND TYPE FFT Select FFT filter Example BAND FFT NARR Select narrow partial span for FFT filter Manual operation See Sweep Type on page 94 See FFT Filter Mode on page 95 See Auto on page 95 See Narrow on page 95 Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 176 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 PEE SENSe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution RATio lt Ratio gt This command defines the ratio between the resolution bandwidth Hz and the span Hz Note that the ratio defined with the remote command RBW span is reciprocal to that of the manual operation span RBW Parameters lt Ratio gt Range 0 0001 to 1 RST 0 01 Example BAND RAT 0 01 Manual operation See Coupling Ratio on page 95 See Span RBW Manual on page 96 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution TYPE lt Filterlype gt This command selects the type of re
185. higher minimum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC DELT2 MAX NEXT Sets delta marker 2 to the next smaller maximum value Manual operation See Next Peak on page 70 See Next Peak Mode on page 70 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum PEAK This command positions the delta marker to the current trace maximum If necessary the corresponding delta marker is activated first Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC DELT3 MAX Sets delta marker 3 to the maximum value of the associated trace Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 132 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 LL SSS a a ae CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt This command positions the delta marker to the next smaller trace maximum on the right of the current value i e ascending X values The corresponding delta marker is activated first if necessary If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC DELT
186. iacddnavedanddadedaadtanedewiedddauiedanadeddiameheccneesanes 201 INPUEDIGERANGS ER TO E 203 INPUEDIOURANGE COU Piling E 203 INPUEDIGRANGS UPPER E 203 INPuCDIORANGet Uppert UNITA 204 INPUE DIQTS RAW EE 204 INPULDIGsSRAVEGAUT O E 205 Oe Ki EE 205 TP A IY Oo EE 205 INPUREAT TSS TAM EE 206 LIPUTGAIINGS RE EE 206 LS GENO A EE 206 INPURSELGCE EE 207 INPut ATTenuation lt Value gt This command programs the input attenuator To protect the input mixer against damage from overloads the setting 0 dB can be obtained by entering numerals not by using the DOWN command The attenuation can be set in 5 dB steps with option R amp S FSV B25 1 dB steps If the defined reference level cannot be set for the set RF attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 200 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 BEES Other Commands Referenced in this Manual In the default state with Spectrum mode the attenuation set on the step attenuator is coupled to the reference level of the instrument If the attenuation is programmed directly the coupling to the reference level is switched off This function is not available if the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 is active Parameters lt Value gt RST 10 dB AUTO is set to ON Example INP ATT 30dB Sets the attenuation on the attenuator to 30 dB and switches off the coupling to the reference level Mode all
187. ialog box click Restore 7 1 2 Softkeys of the Code Domain Analyzer Menu R amp S FSV K73 The Code Domain Analyzer softkey opens the Code Domain Analyzer submenu SNO OV EE 39 Frontend SotNgS cicer iiaiai nienia aAA iana aAa aaar iaai Eaa iaia 40 Ee A0 L Frequency Offset E A0 A 41 Ref Level EE 41 EEAO O A 41 Adjust Re EE 41 I Capture re EE 41 e EE 42 EE 42 Ls Pate SRS Mode ieii a afe a aaa ie 42 L Frame To AMmallyZe c cscscccsscsceccsesecscesensesesenecenansaseccasenssesenseserenesenaneaccecanens 42 L Capture eeh cannae Eed eer 43 L Trigger Source Extemal EE 43 L Trigger Source Free Run 43 L Trg Gate Eegeregie Eegeregie 43 L Tigger Offsdl eanna aea a AEE 43 ee Dulli EE 44 El EE A4 e EE A4 E EE A4 Channel Detection Seung ss ddE SEENEN dE Ee dE SSES 44 UO EE EE 45 L Channel Search Mode 45 L Predefined EE 45 CR E E E E E E E 45 Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 38 R amp S FSV K73 Configuration of 3GPP FDD UE Measurements a SSS SSS ee a a ee Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 Se EEN 46 Ge EE 47 EE 47 Gi 47 DeMOd SSUWINGS EE 47 L Code Power Dep 48 Ee WN EE 48 Pee VN EE 48 L ZE ler 48 Display e e EE 49 le CMAN EN 49 L Select e ET 49 E 50 Select Brne siscviassadecniesacsagadian eege ees 50 Settings Overview The Settings Overview softkey opens the Settings Overview dialog box that visualizes the data flow of the Code Domain Analyzer and summarizes the current sett
188. igh remote control 213 Trigger Polarity em Hot geess tisie iarainn ak REENEN saiia Unit remote Control cc cceeeeeceeeeeeeeeteeeeeeteeeees 153 Use Zoom Limits remote control 3 Video BW Auto remote Control 0 cece 178 Video BW Manual remote Control 177 Video Output Kiel EE 225 R amp S FSV K73 KX Spa ersan X Span remote control x Axis Range remote control ceeeeeeeeeeeeeee x Axis Ref Level remote control ste y Axis Max Value remote control ceeeee 152 Y PER UE y Unit Abs remote control Zero Span remote control ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee Softkey AUTO E 95 100 AUtO RE 72 le 30 67 BB Power Retrigger Holdoff remote control Center remote Control cceeceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 178 E EE EN Clear Write Continue Single Sweep cece ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Continuous Sweep sssssssssessesessrrrssrsrrrrssesre Continuous Sweep remote control EN Cont Meas remote Control Decim Sep remote control c eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees le V EL Atten remote control EL Atten Mode Auto Man remote control 205 El Atten On Off bad EXAQ BOX css cecisscecsstecssecssascceseceuastsdensrecsseateriensenterees led W FFT Filter Mode D Frequency Offset remote control eeeeeeeee Frontend Settings cccceccccec
189. iguration of 3GPP FDD UE Measurements REENERT RF Measurements e Center Frequency Frequency Offset e Input Attenuation Mixer Level e All trigger settings SCPI command CONFigure WCDPower MS MEASurement on page 153 7 2 3 Adjacent Channel Power ACLR Selecting of Adjacent Channel Power ACLR activates the adjacent channel power measurement in the default setting according to 3GPP specifications adjacent channel leakage ratio The R amp S FSV measures the channel power and the relative power of the adjacent channels and of the alternate channels The results are displayed below the screen The following user specific settings are not modified on the first access following preset ting e Reference Level Reference Level Offset e Center Frequency Frequency Offset e Input Attenuation Mixer Level e All trigger settings Pressing the Adjacent Channel Power softkey activates the analyzer mode with defined settings CHAN PWR ACP CP ACP ON CP ACP STANDARD W CDMA 3GPP FWD CP ACP CONFIG NO OF ADJ CHAN 2 To restore adapted measurement parameters the following level parameters are saved on exiting and are set again on re entering this measurement Level Parameters e RBW VBW e Sweep time e SPAN e NO OF ADJ CHANNELS e FAST ACP MODUS For further details about the ACP measurements refer to Settings of CP ACLR Test Parameters of the base unit CONFigure WCDPower MS MEASurement on page 153 Q
190. immediately Remote command TRIG SOUR IMM see TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SOURce on page 209 Trigger Source External Defines triggering via a TTL signal at the EXT TRIG GATE IN input connector on the rear panel An edit dialog box is displayed to define the external trigger level Remote command TRIG SOUR EXT see TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SOURce on page 209 Trigger Polarity Sets the polarity of the trigger source The sweep starts after a positive or negative edge of the trigger signal The default setting is Pos The setting applies to all modes with the exception of the Free Run and Time mode Pos Level triggering the sweep is stopped by the logic 0 signal and restar ted by the logical 1 signal after the gate delay time has elapsed Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 65 R amp S FSV K73 Configuration of 3GPP FDD UE Measurements Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 Neg Edge triggering the sweep is continued on a 0 to 1 transition for the gate length duration after the gate delay time has elapsed Remote command TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SLOPe on page 209 SENSe SWEep EGATe POLarity on page 182 Trigger Offset Opens an edit dialog box to enter the time offset between the trigger signal and the start of the sweep offset gt 0 Start of the sweep is delayed offset lt 0 Sweep starts earlier pre trigger Only possible for span 0 e
191. ing Manual 1176 7590 02 01 185 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 TRACe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 For details on the results see the individual command descriptions Suffix lt n gt 1 4 irrelevant Query parameters lt DataType gt TRACE1 TRACE2 TRACE3 TRACE4 ABITstream CWCDp CTABLe TPVSlot CEVM LIST Example TRAC DATA CEVM Usage Query only Mode WCDMA TRACe lt n gt DATA ABITstream lt n gt This command returns the bit streams of all 15 slots one after the other The output format may be REAL UINT or ASCII The number of bits of a 16QAM modulated channel is twice that of a Q PSK modulated channel the number of bits of a 64QAM modulated channel is three times that of a Q PSK modulated channel This query is only available if the result diagram for the corresponding screen is set to Bitstream e g using the CALC FEED XTIM CDP BSTReam command see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 108 The output format is identical to that of the CALCulate FEED subsystem command for an activated Bitstream display The only difference is the number of symbols which are evaluated The ABITstream parameter evaluates all symbols of one frame Each symbol contains two QPSK or four 16QAM consecutive bits One value is transferred per bit range 0 1 The number of symbols is not constant and may vary depending on the selected channel and its symbol modula
192. ing factor onto which projection is made is shown beneath the measurement result Avg RCDE 4 PAM Average Relative Code Domain Error over all channels detected with 4 PAM in the selected frame Table 7 2 Channel Results Symbol Rate Symbol rate at which the channel is transmitted No of Pilot Bits Indicates the number of pilot bits detected in the control channel Symbol EVM Peak or average of the results of the error vector magnitude measurement The measurement provides information on the EVM of the channel marked red in the CDP diagram in the slot marked red of the power versus slot diagram at the symbol level Chan Power Abs Channel power absolute Timing Offset Offset between the start of the first slot in the channel and the start of the analyzed 3GPP FDD UE frame Channel Slot No The channel slot number is obtained by combining the value of the selected CPICH and the channel s timing offset ss Se Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 56 R amp S FSV K73 Configuration of 3GPP FDD UE Measurements i a ee Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 Modulation Type Indicates the modulation type of the selected channel Valid entries are BPSK for channels on branch I BPSK Q for channels on branch Q and NONE for inactive channels Chan Power Rel Channel relative referred to the total power of the signal Symbol EVM Peak or average of the r
193. ings In addi tion the current settings can be changed via the Settings Overview dialog box To change the settings either use the rotary knob or the curser keys to change the focus to another button and press the ENTER key to open the corresponding dialog box To open the dialog boxes displayed in the Settings Overview dialog box you can also press the particular softkey in the Code Domain Analyzer submenu x RRC Filter On Analysis Mode Frame Center Frequency 15 0 GHz Frame to Analyze 0 Frequency Offset 0 0 Hz Capture Length 1 Preamplifier Off Trigger Source Free Run Type Long Ref Level 1 22 87 dBm Trigger Polarity Positive Format Hex Ref Level Offset 0 0 dB Trigger Offset 0 0s Scrambling Code 00 Descrambling Frontend IQ Capture Sync Search Despreading Channel Demodulation Display Detection Evaluation Configuration HS DPA UPA On Normalize Off Screen A Channel Table Search Mode Auto Code Power Relative Screen B Result Summary Using Table Select Compon I Screen C Composite Const Meas Interval Slot Screen D Channel Table Elim Tail Chips Off Set to default Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 39 R amp S FSV K73 Configuration of 3GPP FDD UE Measurements a SS SS SS SS SS a a a ee eee Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 Setting Refer to Frontend Frontend Settings on page 40 Q Capture IQ Capture Settings on page 41 Descrambling
194. ion rate of a measurement without an external trigger Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 16 R amp S FSV K73 Measurement Examples R amp S FSV K73 El Measurement 5 Measurement of the Composite EVM Setting Trigger Offset A delay of the trigger event referenced to the start of the 3GPP FDD UE frame can be compensated by modifying the trigger offset 1 Settings on the R amp S FSV TRIG gt TRIGGER OFFSET gt 100 us 2 Measurement on the R amp S FSV The Trigger to Frame parameter in the numeric results table screen B changes Trigger to Frame gt 100 us Note A trigger offset compensates analog delays of the trigger event 3 5 Measurement 5 Measurement of the Composite EVM The 3GPP specification defines the composite EVM measurement as the average square deviation of the total signal An ideal reference signal is generated from the demodulated data The test signal and the reference signal are compared with each other The square deviation yields the com posite EVM 1 Test setup a Connect the RF output of the R amp S SMU to the input of the R amp S FSV b Connect the reference input EXT REF IN OUT on the rear panel of the R amp S FSV to the reference input REF on the rear panel of the R amp S SMU coaxial cable with BNC connectors c Connect the external trigger input on the rear panel of the R amp S FSV EXT TRIG GATE to the external trigger output on the rear panel of the R amp S SMU TRIG
195. ion of 3GPP FDD UE Measurements 7 2 6 6 RF Measurements The default value is 691 sweep points Remote command SENSe SWEep POINts on page 182 Softkeys of the Input Output Menu for RF Measurements The following chapter describes all softkeys available in the Input Output menu for RF measurements For CDA measurements see chapter 7 1 12 Softkeys of the Input Out put Menu for CDA Measurements on page 73 Juelfy ee EE 101 Tee EE 101 Vdeo LEE 101 ere Ge eebe NEEN eebe ect 101 TAG GSP EE 102 Input AC DC Toggles the RF input of the R amp S FSV between AC and DC coupling This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command INPut COUPling on page 201 Noise Source Switches the supply voltage for an external noise source on or off For details on con nectors refer to the R amp S FSV Quick Start Guide Front and Rear Panel chapter Remote command DIAGnostic lt n gt SERVice NSOurce on page 210 Video Output Sends a video output signal according to the measured level to the connector on the rear panel of the R amp S FSV Note Video output does not return valid values in IQ or FFT mode Remote command OUTP IF VID see OUTPut IF SOURce on page 213 Power Sensor For precise power measurement a power sensor can be connected to the instrument via the front panel USB connector or the rear panel power sensor option R amp S FSV B
196. irmware R amp S FSV K73 3GPP FDD UE user equip ment test e The Vector Signal Generator R amp S SMU with option R amp S SMU B45 digital standard 3GPP options R amp S SMU B20 and R amp S SMU B11 required e 1 coaxial cable 50Q approx 1m N connector e 1 coaxial cable 50Q approx 1m BNC connector Basic Settings in Code Domain Measurement Mode In the default mode after a PRESET the R amp S FSV is in the analyzer mode The following default settings of the code domain measurement are activated provided that the code domain analyzer mode is selected Parameter Setting Digital standard W CDMA 3GPP REV Sweep CONTINUOUS CDP mode CODE CHAN AUTOSEARCH Trigger settings FREE RUN Trigger offset 0 Scrambling code 0 Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 11 R amp S FSV K73 Measurement Examples R amp S FSV K73 Il Measurement 1 Measurement of the Signal Channel Power Parameter Setting Threshold value 60 dB Symbol rate 15 ksps Code number 0 Slot number 0 Display Screen A Code Power Relative Screen B result Summary 3 1 Measurement 1 Measurement of the Signal Channel Power The measurement of the spectrum gives an overview of the 3GPP FDD UE signal and the spurious emissions close to the carrier 1 Test setup Connect the RF output of the R amp S SMU to the RF input of the R amp S FSV coaxial cable with N connectors 2 Settings on the R amp S SMU
197. is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command INPut ATTenuation AUTO on page 201 El Atten On Off This softkey switches the electronic attenuator on or off This softkey is only available with option R amp S FSV B25 When the electronic attenuator is activated the mechanical and electronic attenuation can be defined separately Note however that both parts must be defined in the same mode i e either both manually or both automatically This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 e To define the mechanical attenuation use the RF Atten Manual Mech Att Manual or RF Atten Auto Mech Att Auto softkeys e To define the electronic attenuation use the El Atten Mode Auto Man softkey Note This function is not available for stop frequencies or center frequencies in zero span gt 7 GHZ In this case the electronic and mechanical attenuation are summarized and the electronic attenuation can no longer be defined individually As soon as the stop or center frequency is reduced below 7 GHz this function is available again When the electronic attenuator is switched off the corresponding RF attenuation mode auto manual is automatically activated Remote command INPut EATT AUTO on page 205 El Atten Mode Auto Man This softkey defines whether the electronic attenuator value is to be set automatically or man
198. isisirissanasirsiiniseei iredi saiia 79 Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 223 R amp S FSV K73 Index offset EQUONCY E 40 60 83 reference level adeeni t e sek Eech edu ge CERS ONSE 41 63 90 Offset i gle 0 E 43 66 Online help Working With WE 8 Options SVB EE 62 88 205 RF Preamplifier B22 c ccccceceeeseeeees 41 62 88 Overwrite mode 0cccccceceeeee sesseseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 29 66 P Peak Code Domain Error ccccscseeceeeeseeeeeteeeeeeeeees 216 PEAKSEARCH uuu ccccccccccessceecceses cecsssceeceesseeeeeeesaeeeeess 70 Ph Noise Auto Peak Search remote Control 130 PilotL PK er RE 56 polarity external tigger iss can tecercenasa ences ee eege EEN 65 external trigger gate cccsseeeceseseresesetenesoeenees 43 geben 43 65 Positive Peak detector cccccccccceeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 28 power channel DOWEL crei ii caseciunsiaves cesnbinne ences eraa power measurement e power of 3GPP FDD UE signal eee eects 77 Preamplifier B22 ccessesscesseseeesesreeesenesoees 41 62 88 pre trigger ES Pwr Abs PWr Rel cccccccceccsssseeeesesssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseneaees 58 Q ele EE 55 R R amp S Digital UO Interface BI 74 201 R amp S Support SOMKEY sriain eiaa aa e e a eee des 76 reference level Le EE 41 63 90 Reference wel isidro isida 41 61 85 Reference Level Digital IQ EE 74 Resolution b
199. ispl Demod Settings Switches between showing the absolute power or the power relative to the chosen ref erence This parameter only affects the display mode Code Domain Power Remote command SENSe CDPower PDIsplay on page 165 Normalize Demod Settings Changes the elimination of the DC offset If the radio button On is selected the DC offset is eliminated Otherwise the DC Offset is not eliminated Remote command SENSe CDPower NORMalize on page 165 Meas Interval Demod Settings Switches between the analysis of an half slot or a full slot Both measurement intervals are influenced by the settings of Eliminate Tail Chips If Eliminate Tail Chips is set to On 96 chips at both ends of the measurement interval are not taken into account for analysis Slot The length of each analysis interval is 2560 chips corresponding to one time slot of the 3GPP signal The time reference for the start of slot 0 is the start of a 3GPP radio frame Halfslot The length of each analysis interval is reduced to 1280 chips corre sponding to half of one time slot of the 3GPP signal Remote command SENSe CDPower HSLot on page 162 Eliminate Tail Chips Demod Settings Selects the length of the measurement interval for calculation of error vector magnitude EVM In accordance with 3GPP specification Release 5 the EVM measurement interval is one slot 4096 chips minus 25 _s at each end of the burst 3904 chi
200. it The available remote commands are described in detail in the STATus QUEStionable subsystem in the base unit 8 6 1 STATus QUEStionable SYNC subsystem R amp S FSV K73 This register contains information on the error situation in the code domain power analysis of the R amp S FS K73 option It can be queried with the following commands STATUs QUEStionable SYNC CON DION aeeiiaii a T EAEan 184 STATUSSQUESIOnable SYNC GC KEE 184 STATus QUEStionable SYNC CONDition This command reads the information on the error situation in the code domain power analysis Return values lt Result gt If the result is ON an error occurred Details can be obtained using STAT QUES SYNC EVEN RST OFF Example STAT QUES SYNC COND Usage Query only Mode WCDMA CDMA EVDO STATus QUEStionable SYNC EVENt This command reads the information on the error situation in the code domain power analysis The value can only be read once The possible events are described in the table below Example STAT QUES SYNC EVEN Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 184 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 De TRACe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Usage Query only Mode WCDMA CDMA EVDO Bit Definition 0 Not used 1 Frame Sync failed This bit is set when synchronization is not possible within the application Possible reasons e Incorrectly set frequency
201. ith respect to the total power Remote command CALC FEED XTIM CDP COMP CONS see chapter 8 2 2 CALCulate FEED subsys tem on page 108 Power vs Slot The Power vs Slot display mode indicates the power of the selected code channel depending on the slot number The power of the selected channel marked red in the CDP diagram is displayed versus all slots of a frame of the 3GPP FDD UE signal The softkey is only valid if one frame of the 3GPP signal is analyzed Beginning at the start of the 3GPP FDD UE frame 15 or 30 successive slots are dis played depending on the value of the SLOT RES softkey The power is shown in abso lute scaling Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 54 R amp S FSV K73 Configuration of 3GPP FDD UE Measurements b_n a ee ee Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 It is not only possible to select a code channel in the CDP diagram but also to mark a slot in the power versus slot diagram Marking is done by entering the slot number The selected slot is marked in red For more detailed displays the marked slot of the channel is used see SLOT entry in the information area above the diagram Modifying a slot number has the following effects e The CDP diagram in the upper half of the display is updated referred to the entered slot number e All results that depend on the selected slot are recalculated for selected channel The relevant graphics are updated Remote command CALC F
202. ix lt n gt n irrelevant Parameters RST 0 dB The first numeric value is the limit for the upper lower adjacent channel The second value is ignored but must be indicated for reasons of compatibility with the FSE family Example CALC LIM ACP ACH 30DB 30DB Sets the relative limit value in for the power in the lower and upper adjacent channel to 30 dB below the channel power Mode WCDMA Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 111 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit1 ACPower ACHannel RELative STATe lt State gt This command activates the limit check for the relative limit value of the adjacent channel when adjacent channel power measurement is performed Before the command the limit check must be activated using CALC LIM ACP STAT ON The result can be queried with CALC LIM ACP ACH RES It should be noted that a complete measurement must be performed between switching on the limit check and the result query since otherwise no valid results are available Suffix lt n gt n irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC LIM ACP ACH REL STAT ON Switches on the check of the relative limit values for adjacent channels Mode WCDMA CALCulate lt n gt LIMit1 ACPower ACHannel ABSolute This command defines the absolute limit value for the lower upper adjacent channel dur ing adjac
203. l input fullscale level is automatically set to the value provided by the connected device if available This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband interface option R amp S FSV B17 is installed For details see the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSV B17 description of the base unit Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example INP DIQ RANG AUTO ON Mode IQ VSA EVDO CDMA WCDMA GSM ADEMOD TDS INPut DIQ RANGe COUPIling lt State gt If enabled the reference level for digital input is adjusted to the full scale level automat ically if the fullscale level changes This command is only available if the optional R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 is installed For details see the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 description of the base unit Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example INP DIQ RANG COUP OFF Mode IQ VSA EVDO CDMA WCDMA GSM ADEMOD TDS Manual operation See Signal Source on page 73 See Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level on page 74 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer lt Level gt Defines or queries the Full Scale Level i e the level that should correspond to an UO sample with the magnitude 1 It can be defined either in dBm or Volt see Full Scale Level on page 74 This command is only available if the optional R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 is installed For details see the R amp
204. lGuWlDtb ACHannel 168 SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth AL Temate channelz 168 IEN Ge IPOWer AC Hanne BANDwidthlGuWwlDtbl CHANnel channelz 167 SENSe POWer ACHannel MODE cs cssessseeensersestensseesneneensccsesenseencaneasensnssenseaneneuassensonsaneaonsesteasanens SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet MCACpower nat IEN Ge POWerACHannelPRtGerbRlEVel SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence AUTO ONCE IGENGe POWer ACHannelHRtterence TSCHannel AUTO 169 IEN Ge POMWer ACHannel GbPACngo Al Termate channel z 171 IGENGe POWer ACHannel GbACTngocCHAhNnel channelz 172 SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing ACHannel cece cece eeceeceeeeneeeeeeeseeeesaeeeeeeeseeseeeseeeseeesetensaees 171 SENSe POWer ACHannel TvCHannelCOUN nat 170 ISENS Tee 172 SENSe POWer NCORS6CHOM Sf ccrsccecedetecscvesas eaa aasian EAA E AEA AEE ARA ESENE EES geet 172 SENSe POWer TRACe SENSe SWEep COUNt ISEN e TauWEep EGATe POLarty thst bbt inae attdis bkta saate nasata traan annn a ennnen 182 ISENSeISwWEep POiNfs EE 182 SENSe SWEep TIME ecsescesssssessssssesssssessssssessssuecsssssecsssuvesssssssssvecssssuessssueessssussssuessssiesssssesssssessssseessene 182 ISENSe TaWEep TIME AUTO bbh t tas bhk taAa bkt n Aae anaana AELA ASAA eana a kenna anena aaee rra at 183 IGENSe IawEepTEt taet htnas htt n abhna Aa Anaa E AAAA AE AELA SAAE LASA t anaana rasanne naana raa 183 le Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 221
205. lable for CDA measurements For RF measurements see the description for the base unit Oe e E EE 68 Marker Norm Delaien an ae a a aa ea Tiaa 69 Marker ZOO a a a Eelere 69 FP MF EE 69 Marker 1 2 3 4 Selects the corresponding marker and activates it Marker 1 is always a normal marker After Marker 2 to 4 have been switched on they are delta markers that are referenced to Marker 1 These markers can be converted into markers with absolute value displays using the Marker Norm Delta softkey When Marker 1 is the active marker pressing the Marker Norm Delta softkey switches on an additional delta marker Pressing the Marker 1 to Marker 4 softkey again switches the corresponding marker off Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe on page 120 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 121 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y on page 122 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe on page 134 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X on page 135 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X RELative on page 135 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt Y on page 136 Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 68 R amp S FSV K73 Configuration of 3GPP FDD UE Measurements 7 1 10 Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 Marker Norm Delta Changes the active marker to a normal norm or delta marker with respect to marker 1 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt
206. ld be noted that synchronization to the end of the indicated number of measurements is only possible in single sweep mode Suffix lt n gt window For applications that do not have more than 1 measure ment window the suffix lt n gt is irrelevant lt t gt trace Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 195 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 BREET Other Commands Referenced in this Manual Parameters lt Mode gt WRITe VIEW AVERage MAXHold MINHold BLANk RST WRITe for TRACe1 STATe OFF for TRACe2 3 4 5 6 For details on trace modes refer to chapter 6 3 4 Trace Mode Overview on page 29 Example INIT CONT OFF Switching to single sweep mode SWE COUN 16 Sets the number of measurements to 16 DISP TRAC3 MODE MAXH Switches on the calculation of the maximum peak for trace 3 INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the 16 sweeps Manual operation See Clear Write on page 29 See Max Hold on page 29 See Min Hold on page 29 See Average on page 30 See View on page 30 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe lt State gt This command switches on or off the display of the corresponding trace The other meas urements are not aborted but continue running in the background Suffix lt n gt window For applications that do not have more than 1 measure ment window the suffix lt n gt is irrelevant lt t gt trace Parameters
207. le for single sweeps Suffix lt n gt irrelevant lt k gt limit line Return values lt Result gt 0 PASS 1 FAIL Example INIT WAI Starts a new sweep and waits for its end CALC LIM3 FAIL Queries the result of the check for limit line 3 Usage Query only 8 2 6 3 CALCulate LIMit ESPectrum subsystem The CALCulate LIMit ESPectrum subsystem defines the limit check for the Spec trum Emission Mask CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum LIMits ccccceeccceceseceeseeceenececaeeceeeseeseneeeseseeeanees 143 CAL Culate lt n gt LIMitek gt ESPecthum MODE innnan apaa aa aa ai 144 CAL Culate nzLlMitcks E bechumbClass CasszTENClushvel erene ne nene 144 CAL Culate nz LUlMitcks E bechum PClass Cass OUNI 145 CAL Culate nzLlMitcks EGbechum bClass Cass LIMIITGTATel eenen 145 CAL Culate nz LUlMitcks EG bechum PClLass Cassz MANimum 146 CAL Culate nz LUlMitcks E bechum PClLass Cassz MiNimum 146 CAL Culate nz LUlMitcks E bechumbRtGtore 146 GAL Culate lt n gt LI Mitsk gt ESPectrum VALUE ciinii ia i a 147 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum LIMits lt Limits gt This command sets or queries up to 4 power classes in one step Suffix lt n gt irrelevant lt k gt irrelevant Parameters lt Limits gt 1 3 numeric values between 200 and 200 separated by commas 200 lt 0 3 numeric values between 200 and 200 in ascending order separated by commas gt 200 Oper
208. lity with the FSE family Example CALC LIM ACP ALT2 ABS 35DBM 35DBM Sets the absolute limit value for the power in the lower and upper second alternate adjacent channel to 35 dBm Mode WCDMA CALCulate lt n gt LIMit1 ACPower ALTernate lt 1 11 gt ABSolute STATe lt State gt This command activates the limit check for the selected alternate adjacent channel in the selected measurement window for adjacent channel power measurement Adjacent Channel Power Before the command the limit check must be globally switched on for the channel adja cent channel power with the command CALC LIM ACP STAT ON The numeric suffix after ALTernate denotes the alternate channel The result can be queried with CALC LIM ACP ALT RES It should be noted that a complete measurement must be performed between switching on the limit check and the result query since otherwise no valid results are available Suffix lt n gt 1 4 irrelevant Parameters ON OFF RST OFF Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 115 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 8 2 4 CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Example CALC LIM ACP ACH ABS STAT ON Switches on the check of absolute limit values for the first alternate adjacent channels Mode WCDMA CALCulate lt n gt LIMit1 ACPower ALTernate lt 1 11 gt RESult This command queries the result of the limit check for the selected alternate adjacent ch
209. lly set to the same value With SENSe lt source gt POWer HSPeed set to ON steep edged channel filters are available For further information on filters refer to chapter 6 3 6 List of Available RRC and Channel Filters on page 31 Suffix lt channel gt 1 11 the alternate adjacent channel Parameters lt Bandwidth gt 100 Hz to 40 GHz RST 14 kHz Example POW ACH BWID ALT2 30 kHz SENSe POWer ACHannel MODE lt Mode gt This command switches between absolute and relative adjacent channel measurement The command is only available with span gt 0 and if the number of adjacent channels is greater than 0 For the relative measurement the reference value is set to the currently measured chan nel power using the command SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence AUTO ONCE Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 168 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 El SENSe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Parameters lt Mode gt ABSolute RELative ABSolute absolute adjacent channel measurement RELative relative adjacent channel measurement RST RELative Example POW ACH MODE REL Sets the adjacent channel measurement mode to relative SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet RLEVel This command adapts the reference level to the measured channel power and if required switches on previously the adjacent channel power measurement This ensures that the signal path of the instrument is n
210. lot ref erenced to CPICH or total power dB The channel slot can be marked by the SELECTED CPICH slot lt timing offset gt Timing offset of the HS DPCCH to the frame start The value is measured in chips The step width is 256 chips For all other data channels the timing offset is zero 0 2560 chips lt pilot length gt Pilot length of the DPCCH 0 to 8 symbols lt active flag gt Flag to indicate whether a channel is active 0 channel not active 1 channel active lt channel type gt Channel type indication 0 4 0 DPDCH Dedicated Physical Data Channel 1 DPCCH Dedicated Physical Control Channel 2 HS DPCCH High Speed Dedicated Physical Control Channel 3 E DPCCH Enhanced Dedicated Physical Control Channel 4 E DPDCH Enhanced Dedicated Physical Data Channel lt modulation type gt Modulation type of the code channel at the selected channel slot 2 Modulation type QPSK reserved 189 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 TRACe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 for future use Example TRAC DATA CWCDp Returns a list of channel information for each channel in ascending order Usage Query only Mode WCDMA TRACe lt n gt DATA LIST This command returns the peak list of the spectrum emission mask measurement list evaluation See also TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 191 Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window Return values lt Result gt lt
211. lt FFT Filter Mode Sweep Type For an RBW lt 10kHz the FFT filters with the smaller partial span are used This allows you to perform measurements near a carrier with a reduced reference level due to a narrower analog prefilter Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution FFT on page 176 Sweep Count Opens an edit dialog box to enter the number of sweeps to be performed in the single sweep mode Values from 0 to 32767 are allowed If the values 0 or 1 are set one sweep is performed The sweep count is applied to all the traces in a diagram If the trace configurations Average Max Hold or Min Hold are set the sweep count value also determines the number of averaging or maximum search procedures In continuous sweep mode if sweep count 0 default averaging is performed over 10 sweeps For sweep count 1 no averaging maxhold or minhold operations are per formed Remote command SENSe SWEep COUNt on page 181 Sweep Points Opens an edit dialog box to enter the number of measured values to be collected during one sweep e Entry via rotary knob Inthe range from 101 to 1001 the sweep points are increased or decreased in steps of 100 points Inthe range from 1001 to 32001 the sweep points are increased or decreased in steps of 1000 points e Entry via keypad All values in the defined range can be set Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 100 R amp S FSV K73 Configurat
212. lt 15 groups with 6 values per group are returned lt slot0 gt lt EVMO0O gt lt BeginMeas0O gt lt End Meas0 gt lt Reserved_A0 gt lt Reserved_BO gt lt slot1 gt lt EVM1 gt lt BeginMeas1 gt lt EndMeas1 gt lt Reserved_A1 gt lt Reserved_B1 gt lt slot14 gt lt EVM14 gt lt BeginMeas14 gt lt End Meas14 gt lt Reserved_A14 gt lt Reserved_B14 gt Example TRAC2 DATA CEVM Usage Query only TRACe lt n gt DATA CTABLe This command returns the channel state active inactive in addition to the values returned for TRACE lt n gt Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 187 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 TRACe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Return values lt Result gt lt class gt lt channel number gt lt absolute level gt lt relative level UO component gt lt pilot length gt lt channel state gt Comma separated list with 7 values for each channel the pilot length is always 0 For details on the other result information see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 191 Example TRAC DATA CTABLe Returns a list of channel information including the pilot length and channel state Usage Query only Mode WCDMA TRACe lt n gt DATA CWCDp This command returns pilot length channel state channel type modulation type and a reserved value in addition to the values returned for TRACE lt n gt see TRACe lt n gt DATA
213. lyzer Measurements K73 Ref Level Frontend Settings Opens an edit dialog box to enter the reference level in the current unit dBm dBuV etc The reference level is the maximum value the AD converter can handle without distortion of the measured value Signal levels above this value will not be measured correctly which is indicated by the IFOVL status display Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel on page 198 Ref Level Offset Frontend Settings Opens an edit dialog box to enter the arithmetic level offset This offset is added to the measured level irrespective of the selected unit The scaling of the y axis is changed accordingly The setting range is 200 dB in 0 1 dB steps Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 198 Preamp On Off Frontend Settings Switches the preamplifier on and off If option R amp S FSV B22 is installed the preamplifier is only active below 7 GHz If option R amp S FSV B24 is installed the preamplifier is active for all frequencies This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command INPut GAIN STATe on page 206 Adjust Ref Lvi Frontend Settings Defines the optimal reference level for the current measurement automatically Remote command SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 174 IQ Capture Settings Opens the IQ Capt
214. main power meas urements Only the numeric suffix 1 is permissible in CONFigure CONFigu ure WCDPower MS MEASUTEMENt ainina aiian aaa 153 CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle STATe 2 ceseeeeeeceecaeeeeeeeeeeneeececeeeeeteeeaaneaeenans 154 CONFloure WCDbower MS CTABleNAME 154 CONFigure WCDPowerMS CTABle SEleet 2 020 ENEE ERKENNEN AER 155 CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle DATA cccccsecececeseeeseteeeeceteteeeneceaesenaneaaaeaneneeeeens 155 CONFloure WCDbower MS CTAble DATA HGDbech nenene 156 CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle COMME Nk e cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeaeaeaaaaaenedeeeeenes 156 CONFigure WCDPowerMS CTABIGICOPY oisi ceeie ce cccieccee EENS ERKENNEN ee E 157 CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle DELete 22 c ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeenecececeaaneneaennaaeenetenees 157 CONFloure WCDbower MS CTAble CATalogg nene osorrsrrnsnrentnttetororernsnnnntnent 157 CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle EDATA 2 ccsceceeeneceneeeanasaeeseneeeeeeeeeeseneeeaeaaaeenenens 157 CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle EDATa EDPCC cccccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeaeeaeteeeeeeseeeaaaeeees 158 CONFigure WCDPower MS MEASurement lt Type gt This command selects the 3GPP FDD UE user equipment tests Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 153 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 CONFigure WCDPower subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Parameters lt Type gt ACLR ESPectrum WCDPower POWer OBANdwith OBWidth CCDF
215. mand switches on or off the instrument display If switched on only the diagrams traces and display fields are displayed and updated The best performance is obtained if the display output is switched off during remote con trol Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example SYST DISP UPD ON R amp S FSV K73 Error Messages 9 Error Messages Error messages are entered in the error event queue of the status reporting system in the remote control mode and can be queried with the command SySTem ERRor A short explanation of the device specific error messages for R amp S FSV K73 is given below Status bar message Description Sync not found This message is displayed if synchronization is not possible Possible causes are that frequency level scrambling code Invert Q values are set incorrectly or the input signal is invalid Sync OK This message is displayed if synchronization is possible Incorrect pilot symbols This message is displayed if one or more of the received pilot symbols are not equal to the specified pilot symbols of the 3GPP standard Possible causes are e Incorrectly sent pilot symbols in the received frame e Low signal to noise ratio SNR of the WCDMA signal e One or more code channels have a significantly lower power level compared to the total power The incorrect pilots are detected in these channels because of low channel SNR e Oneor more channels are sent with high powe
216. mote con trol commands for the 3GPP FDD UE user equipment test This part of the documentation consists of the following chapters e chapter 3 Measurement Examples R amp S FSV K73 on page 11 Explains some basic 3GPP FDD user equipment tests e chapter 4 Setup for User Equipment Tests on page 20 Describes the measurement setup for user equipment tests e chapter 5 3GPP FDD UE Test Models on page 22 Gives an overview over the test models with different channel configurations e chapter 6 Instrument Functions 3GPP User Equipment Measurements on page 24 Describes the instrument functions of 3GPP user equipment measurements e chapter 7 Configuration of 3GPP FDD UE Measurements on page 34 Contains a detailed description of the possible user equipment test measurements as a reference for manual operation This chapter also presents a list of remote control commands associated with each function e chapter 8 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 on page 103 Describes all remote control commands defined for the code domain measurement An alphabetic list of all remote control commands are provided at the end of this document e chapter 9 Error Messages on page 215 Contains device specific error messages for R amp S FSV K73 e chapter 10 Glossary on page 216 Contains an explanation of terms related to measured quantities of the code domain measurement This part of the documentation includes onl
217. mplemented in the basic unit For the other modes the corresponding options are required Upper Lower Case Notation Upper lower case letters are used to mark the long or short form of the key words of a command in the description The instrument itself does not distinguish between upper and lower case letters Special Characters A selection of key words with an identical effect exists for several commands These keywords are indicated in the same line they are separated by a vertical stroke Only one of these keywords needs to be included in the header of the command The effect of the command is independent of which of the keywords is used Example SENSe FREQuency CW FIXed The two following commands with identical meaning can be created They set the fre quency of the fixed frequency signal to 1 kHz SENSe FREQuency CW 1E3 SENSe FREQuency FIXed 1E3 A vertical stroke in parameter indications marks alternative possibilities in the sense of or The effect of the command differs depending on which parameter is used Example Selection of the parameters for the command SENSe lt 1 4 gt AVERage lt 1 4 gt TYPE VIDeo LiINear 0 Key words in square brackets can be omitted when composing the header The full command length must be accepted by the instrument for reasons of compatibility with the SCPI standards Parameters in square brackets can be incorporated op
218. mplifier on and off With option R amp S FSV B22 the preamplifier only has an effect below 7 GHz With option R amp S FSV B24 the amplifier applies to the entire frequency range This command is not available when using R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example INP GAIN STAT ON Turns the preamplifier on Manual operation See Frontend Settings on page 40 See Preamp On Off on page 41 INPut IMPedance lt Impedance gt This command selects the nominal input impedance 75 Q should be selected if the 50 Q input impedance is transformed to a higher impedance using a 75 Q adapter of the RAZ type 25 Q in series to the input impedance of the instrument The correction value in this case is 1 76 dB 10 log 750 500 This function is not available if the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 is active Parameters lt Impedance gt 50 75 RST 50 Q Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 206 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 BREET Other Commands Referenced in this Manual Example INP IMP 75 Manual operation See Input 50 0 75 Q on page 91 INPut SELect lt Source gt This command selects the signal source for measurements Parameters lt Source gt RF DIQ RF Radio Frequency RF INPUT connector DIQ Digital IQ only available with R amp S Digital I Q Interface option R amp S FSV B17 RST RF Exam
219. n a kind of envelope This mode is not available for statistics measurements Remote command DISP TRAC MODE MAXH see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 195 Min Hold The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed The R amp S FSV saves the smallest of the previously stored currently measured values in the trace memory The detector is automatically set to Negative Peak This mode is useful e g for making an unmodulated carrier in a composite signal visible Noise interference signals or modulated signals are suppressed whereas a CW signal is recognized by its constant level Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 29 R amp S FSV K73 Instrument Functions 3GPP User Equipment Measurements REESEN Further Information This mode is not available for statistics measurements Remote command DISP TRAC MODE MINH see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 195 Average The average is formed over several sweeps The Sweep Count determines the number of averaging procedures All available detectors can be selected If the detector is automatically selected the sam ple detector is used see chapter 6 3 3 Detector Overview on page 28 This mode is not available for statistics measurements Remote command DISP TRAC MODE AVER see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 195 View The current contents of the trace memory ar
220. nd has the same effect as the SENSe lt source gt SWEep COUNt com mand In both cases the number of measurements is defined whether the average cal culation is active or not The number of measurements applies to all traces in the window Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 174 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 Parameters SENSe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 lt NoMeasurements gt 0 to 32767 Example RST 0 SWE CONT OFF Switching to single sweep mode AVER COUN 16 Sets the number of measurements to 16 AVER STAT ON Switches on the calculation of average INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the 16 sweeps SENSe JAVERage lt n gt TYPE lt FunctionType gt This command selects the type of average function Suffix lt n gt Parameters lt FunctionType gt Example Selects the measurement window ViDeo LINear POWer viDeo The logarithmic power values are averaged LiNear The power values are averaged before they are converted to log arithmic values POWer The power level values are converted into unit Watt prior to aver aging After the averaging the data is converted back into its orig inal unit RST ViDeo AVER TYPE LIN Switches to linear average calculation SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution lt Bandwidth gt This command defines the resol
221. ndow lt m gt Selects the marker Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT1 ON Switches marker 1 to delta marker mode Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 134 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Manual operation See Marker 1 2 3 4 on page 68 See Marker Norm Delta on page 69 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt TRACe lt TraceNumber gt This command selects the trace a delta marker is positioned on The corresponding trace must have a trace mode other than Blank Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Parameters lt TraceNumber gt 1 6 Trace number the marker is positioned on Example CALC DELT3 TRAC 2 Assigns delta marker 3 to trace 2 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X lt Position gt This command positions a delta marker on a particular coordinate on the x axis The position is an absolute value Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Parameters lt Position gt 0 to maximum frequency or sweep time Example CALC DELT X Outputs the absolute frequency time of delta marker 1 Manual operation See Marker 1 2 3 4 on page 68 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X RELative This command queries the x value of the selected delta marker relative to marker 1 or to the reference position for CALC DELT FU
222. ndwidths are configured in the SENSe POWer subsystem Note If CPOWer is selected the number of adjacent channels SENSe POWer ACHannel ACPairs is set to 0 If ACPower is selected the number of adjacent chan nels is set to 1 unless adjacent channel power measurement is switched on already The channel adjacent channel power measurement is performed for the trace selected with SENSe POWer TRACe The occupied bandwidth measurement is performed for the trace on which marker 1 is positioned To select another trace for the measurement marker 1 is to be positioned on the desired trace by means of CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRACe Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 125 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 lt m gt Parameters lt MeasType gt Example CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Selects the marker ACPower CPOWer MCACpower OBANdwidth OBWidth CN CNO ACPower Adjacent channel power measurement with a single carrier signal CPOWer Channel power measurement with a single carrier signal equiv alent to adjacent channel power measurement with NO OF ADJ CHAN 0 MCACpower Channel adjacent channel power measurement with several car rier signals OBANdwidth OBWidth Measurement of occupied bandwidth CN Measurement of carrier to noise ratio CNO Measurement of carrier to noise ratio
223. ne ia i e a En Eae e r enese EAE EE TEENA Aaea ENEE UREE EENEN 166 SENSe CDPOWer SFACUO8 scsiccscccicccesetesetesssecsscecosscvsnsevenseseusersnrectecsenaesctcossscaucicontsviseseasisnstensaseasstencoeesseess 166 SENSe CDPower SLOT SENSe FREQUENCY CENT Gl iirin peitrino sadada aast aa eara daaa iaaea pa aradi aa aanrada ian 178 SENSe FREQuency CEN Ter STEP vroin neudane eeen annann lerhueaeshceenabeedeassstousersanteyortstesmandavennesate 179 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO 0 cece cece cceeceneeeeeeeeeaeeseaeeesaeeseaeeseaeessaeeseaeeseaeessseeseatessaeeeenees 179 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK 0 cece ceccceeceneeeeeeceeeseaeeseaeeseaeessaeeseaeeeeaeessaeessaeeseaeesseessaees 179 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK FACTOM 0 c cc ccccececeeeeeeeeeseceeseneeseeeseeseaeeseaeeeaeeseeeseseeeeaeeneees 180 SENSE FREQUenCy OFF Sefii iniiaiee eiai eya eai adane Epi N eddir 180 ISENS FREQUENCY SPAN sviesiai viiesa anaia ea iadaaa Eeer AEAT ENE 181 ISENSe FREQuency SPAN FUL i cccscccccecssscrececenscevvecesstenscsecssscnsozsesossssseusescevedevaniasscapadedsesccnseesesassessertaseas 181 SENSe FREQuency STARt SENSe FREQUENCY S OP weccctrccsecct dacteedescctecencrsstecaedeteiteaedvectivuedvosbadencevessseeeepadbnduncdossneaedesdeiepeedberiecaeceo nines SENSe POWer ACHannel ACPAirs cccccccesscscesceensersescceseeseneesscecesnegnsensenceasenenseeectseaseesnsensenseaseusnseeronsens 167 IEN Ge IPOWer AC Hanne BANDwidth
224. nearest possible bandwidth For rotary knob or UP DNARROW key inputs the bandwidth is adjusted in steps either upwards or down wards The manual input mode of the resolution bandwidth is indicated by a green bullet next to the RBW display in the channel bar This softkey is available for all RF measurements except for Power measurements Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth ESolution AUTO on page 176 ESolution on page 175 J J Res BW Auto Couples the resolution bandwidth to the selected span for span gt 0 If you change the span the resolution bandwidth is automatically adjusted This setting is recommended if you need the ideal resolution bandwidth in relation to a particular span This softkey is available for measuring the Adjacent Channel Power the Occupied Band width and the CCDF Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution AUTO on page 176 Video BW Manual Opens an edit dialog box to enter the video bandwidth The available video bandwidths are specified in the data sheet Numeric input is always rounded to the nearest possible bandwidth For rotary knob or UP DOWN key inputs the bandwidth is adjusted in steps either upwards or downwards The manual input mode of the video bandwidth is indicated by a green bullet next to the VBW display in the channel bar Note RMS detector and VBW Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 92 R amp S FSV
225. nels DPDCH and E DPDCH that are contained in the signal As specified in 3GPP the channel table can contain up to 6 DPDCHs or up to 4 E DPDCHs The channels are in descending order according to symbol rates and within a symbol rate in ascending order according to the channel num bers Therefore the unassigned codes are always to be found at the end of the table Physical channels used in 3GPP UPLINK signals according to Release 99 specification DPCCH The Dedicated Physical Control Channel is used to synchronize the signal It carries pilot symbols and is expected in the Q branch at code class 8 with code number 0 The channel is displayed in the upper part of the table DPDCH The Dedicated Physical Data Channel is used to carry UPLINK data from the UE to the BS The code allocation depends on the total required symbol rate The following table represents the possible configurations of DPCH spreading factors and code allocation OS I Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 57 R amp S FSV K73 Configuration of 3GPP FDD UE Measurements Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 HSDPCCH EDPCCH The High Speed Dedicated Physical Control Channel for HS DCH is used to carry control information CQI ACK NACK for downlink high speed data channels HS DCH It is used in HSDPA signal setup The data rate is fixed to 15ksps The code allocation depends on the number of active DPCH and is described in the table below This
226. nfiguration for the current measurement Example ADJ ALL Manual operation See Auto All on page 72 SENSe JADJust CONFiguration HYSTeresis LOWer lt Threshold gt This command defines a lower threshold the signal must drop below before the reference level is automatically adjusted when the Auto Level function is performed For more information see SENSe ADJust LEVel1 Parameters lt Threshold gt Range 0 to 200 RST 1 dB Default unit dB Example SENS ADJ CONF HYST LOW 2 Example For an input signal level of currently 20 dBm the reference level will only be adjusted when the signal level falls below 18 dBm Manual operation See Settings on page 72 See Lower Level Hysteresis on page 73 SENSe JADJust CONFiguration HYSTeresis UPPer lt Threshold gt This command defines an upper threshold the signal must exceed before the reference level is automatically adjusted when the Auto Level function is performed For more information see SENSe ADJust LEVel1 Parameters lt Threshold gt Range 0 to 200 RST 1 dB Default unit dB Example SENS ADJ CONF HYST UPP 2 For an input signal level of currently 20 dBm the reference level will only be adjusted when the signal level rises above 22 dBm Manual operation See Settings on page 72 See Upper Level Hysteresis on page 72 Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 173 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73
227. ng table shows all softkeys available in the Sweep menu It is possible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys If a softkey is only available with a special option model or measurement mode this information is provided in the corresponding softkey description COMUMUOUS SWS lt chcccccaasctlercccanen accaxacantensaadacnaiexcharcdesnudauaanennnan deadadearedshaasecanensbanaattawees 98 SUIS AS E 98 COnTNUG SINGS SWOOP EE 98 Sweepime MANUAL E 98 ee lU EE 99 VUES KEE 99 EE EE 99 GE 99 tee Eege 100 EY ET E 100 LAO sa ane eee a eS 100 Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 97 R amp S FSV K73 Configuration of 3GPP FDD UE Measurements RF Measurements tate ee 100 PISS TIS OUI ET 100 SWEEP POMS EE 100 Continuous Sweep Sets the continuous sweep mode the sweep takes place continuously according to the trigger settings This is the default setting The trace averaging is determined by the sweep count value see the Sweep Count softkey Sweep Count on page 65 Remote command INIT CONT ON see INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 211 Single Sweep Sets the single sweep mode after triggering starts the number of sweeps that are defined by using the Sweep Count softkey The measurement stops after the defined number of sweeps has been performed Remote command INIT CONT OFF see INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 211 Continue Single Sweep Repeats the number of sweeps set by using the Swe
228. nnt nnanatnnnnntnnnntE nanen naen n nae CALCulatecnzGTATlsticeGCAlevLOWer A CALCulatecnzGTATlstice GCAleyv UNITA CALCulatecnzGTATlsticeGCAlev Uber EE Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 218 R amp S FSV K73 List of Commands CONFioure WCDbower MS CTAble DATA HGDbech CONFioure WC Dbower MG CTAble DEL erte CONFioure WCDbower MS CTAble EDATa cece cceececeeeneeeeeeeceeeseaeseaeesceeseeseaeeseaeseaeesseeesseeseaeeneees CONFioure WCDbower MS CTAbie EDATaEDbCe nennen CONFioure WC Dbower MS CTABeNAME nnne CONFioure WC Dbower MG CTAble GE ec CONFioure WCDbower MS CTAbel SGTATel CONFioure WC Dbower MS MEAGurement DiAGnostic nz GERVicehGOurce ttnt tn tt tn nttEASAEEEESAEEEEAAEEEEAEEEEESEEEEEAEEEEAEEEE Eann nae DISPl y WINDOW lt N gt STAT Opiini iia ia ai ii iaia DlSblavf WiNDow nzTR ACectGMODE nanena Earen ennnen neea DlSblavfWiNDow nzTRACect WV GbPACmg eee ce ececeecnee eee ceeeeseaeeceeseaeeseaeseaeeseaeeeeeseaeesseeseaeeseaees DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALE 00 cccccccceccccceeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeaeeceeeseaeeseaeeseeecseeenaeeseesseeeeseeesaees DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MODE D DlSblavf WiNDow nzTR ACect Wl SCALelb ivielon 197 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVEL eee cece cere cene eens eeeeeeeeseaeeseaeeeeeseaeeseeeteaeenaees 198 DlSblavf WiN Dow nzTR ACectvlSCALelbRlEvelOttz et nnt 198 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RP
229. nts the maximum number of sweep points in all ranges is limited to 100001 Parameters lt NumberPoints gt Range 101 to 32001 RST 691 Example SWE POIN 251 Manual operation See Sweep Points on page 100 SENSe SWEep EGATe POLarity lt Polarity gt This command determines the polarity of the external gate signal The setting applies both to the edge of an edge triggered signal and the level of a level triggered signal Parameters lt Polarity gt POSitive NEGative RST POSitive Example SWE EGAT POL POS Manual operation See Trigger Polarity on page 65 SENSe SWEep TIME lt Time gt This command defines the sweep time The range depends on the frequency span Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 182 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 Parameters lt Time gt Example Manual operation SENSe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 refer to data sheet For R amp S FSV spectrum analyzers with an FMR7 CPU board order no 1091 3204 with R amp S FSV models 1307 9002Kxx only and 1 GByte RAM the maximum capture time is 600 ms Otherwise it is 1s RST AUTO is set to ON SWE TIME 10s See Sweeptime Manual on page 84 SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO lt State gt In realtime mode this command automatically sets the sweep time to 32 ms In analyzer mode this command controls the automatic coupling of the sweep time to the frequency span and bandwi
230. of these channels are determined by the CDP measurement Channel Type Type of channel active channels only Symbol Rate Symbol rate at which the channel is transmitted Channel Number Number of channel spreading code 0 to spreading factor 1 Use TFCI Timing Offset Pilot Bits Number of pilot bits of the channel only valid for the control channel DPCCH CDP Relative Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 27 R amp S FSV K73 Instrument Functions 3GPP User Equipment Measurements 6 3 3 Further Information Status Confilct Detector Overview The measurement detector for the individual display modes can be selected directly by the user or set automatically by the R amp S FSV The detector activated for the specific trace is indicated in the corresponding trace display field by an abbreviation The detectors of the R amp S FSV are implemented as pure digital devices They collect signal power data within each measured point during a sweep The default number of sweep points is 691 The following detectors are available Table 6 1 Detector types Detector Indicator Function Auto Peak Ap Determines the maximum and the minimum value within a measurement point not available for SEM Positive Peak Pk Determines the maximum value within a measure ment point Negative Peak min peak Mi Determines the minimum value within a measurement point RMS
231. og box to enter the attenuation irrespective of the reference level If electronic attenuation is activated option R amp S FSV B25 only El Atten Mode Auto soft key this setting defines the mechanical attenuation The mechanical attenuation can be set in 10 dB steps The RF attenuation can be set in 5 dB steps with option R amp S FSV B25 1 dB steps The range is specified in the data sheet If the current reference level cannot be set for the set RF attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 The RF attenuation defines the level at the input mixer according to the formula levelmixer lEVelinput RF attenuation Note As of firmware version 1 61 the maximum mixer level allowed is 0 dBm Mixer levels above this value may lead to incorrect measurement results which are indicated by the OVLD status display The increased mixer level allows for an improved signal but also increases the risk of overloading the instrument Remote command INPut ATTenuation on page 200 Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 88 R amp S FSV K73 Configuration of 3GPP FDD UE Measurements REESEN RF Measurements RF Atten Auto Mech Att Auto Sets the RF attenuation automatically as a function of the selected reference level This ensures that the optimum RF attenuation is always used It is the default setting This function
232. onfiguration of 3GPP FDD UE Measurements a SS SS SS a Ml ll eS Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 RX Settings EXIQ Opens the EX IQ BOX Settings dialog box to configure the R amp S FSV for digital input from a connected device Receiver Type Send To EXIQ The configuration settings defined in the dialog box are transferred to the R amp S EX IQ BOX Firmware Update EXIQ If a firmware update for the R amp S EX IQ BOX is delivered with the R amp S FSV firmware this function is available In this case when you select the softkey the firmware update is performed R amp S Support EXIQ Stores useful information for troubleshooting in case of errors This data is stored in the C R_S Instr user Support directory on the instrument If you contact the Rohde amp Schwarz support to get help for a certain problem send these files to the support in order to identify and solve the problem faster DiglConf EXIQ Starts the optional R amp S DiglConf application This softkey is only available if the optional software is installed To return to the R amp S FSV application press any key on the front panel The application is displayed with the EXIQ menu regardless of which key was pressed For details on the R amp S DiglConf application see the R amp S EX IQ BOX Digital Interface Module R amp S Dig Conf Software Operating Manual Note If you close the R amp S DiglConf window using the Close icon the win
233. or is automatically selected the sam ple detector is used see chapter 6 3 3 Detector Overview on page 28 This mode is not available for statistics measurements Remote command DISP TRAC MODE AVER see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 195 View The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and displayed Note If a trace is frozen the instrument settings apart from level range and reference level see below can be changed without impact on the displayed trace The fact that Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 67 R amp S FSV K73 Configuration of 3GPP FDD UE Measurements Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 the displayed trace no longer matches the current instrument setting is indicated by the icon on the tab label If the level range or reference level is changed the R amp S FSV automatically adapts the measured data to the changed display range This allows an amplitude zoom to be made after the measurement in order to show details of the trace Remote command DISP TRAC MODE VIEW see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 195 Softkeys of the Marker Menu MKR key R amp S FSV K73 The MKR key opens a submenu for the marker settings Markers are not available for the following result diagrams e Result Summary e Channel Table In all other result diagrams up to four markers can be activated The following softkeys are avai
234. ot overloaded Since the measurement bandwidth is significantly smaller than the signal bandwidth in channel power measure ments the signal path can be overloaded although the trace is still significantly below the reference level If the measured channel power equals the reference level the signal path is not overloaded Subsequent commands have to be synchronized with WAI OPC or OPC to the end of the auto range process which would otherwise be aborted Example POW ACH PRES RLEV WAI Adapts the reference level to the measured channel power SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence AUTO ONCE This command sets the reference value to the currently measured channel power for the relative measurement Example POW ACH REF AUTO ONCE SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence TXCHannel AUTO lt Channel gt This command activates the automatic selection of a transmission channel to be used as a reference channel in relative adjacent channel power measurements The transmission channel with the highest power the transmission channel with the low est power or the transmission channel nearest to the adjacent channels can be defined as a reference channel The command is available only for multicarrier channel and adjacent channel power measurements with span gt 0 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer SELect on page 125 Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 169 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R
235. ow for adjacent channel power measurements The reference value for the relative limit value is the measured channel power The numeric suffix after ALTernate lt 1 11 gt denotes the first or the second alternate channels It should be noted that the relative limit value has no effect on the limit check as soon as it is below the absolute limit defined with CALC LIM ACP ALT ABS This mechanism allows automatic checking of the absolute basic values of adjacent channel power as defined in mobile radio standards Suffix lt n gt 1 4 irrelevant lt ch gt 1 11 alternate channel Parameters RST O0dB The first value is the limit for the lower and the upper alternate adjacent channel The second limit value is ignored but must be indicated for reasons of compatibility with the FSE family Example CALC LIM ACP ALT2 30DB 30DB Sets the relative limit value for the power in the lower and upper second alternate adjacent channel to 30 dB below the channel power Mode WCDMA CALCulate lt n gt LIMit1 ACPower AL Ternate lt ch gt RELative STATe lt State gt This command activates the limit check for the selected alternate adjacent channel in the selected measurement window for adjacent channel power measurements Before the command the limit check must be activated using CALC LIM ACP STAT ON The numeric suffix after ALTernate denotes alternate channel The result can be queried with CALC LIM ACP ALT lt 1 11 gt RES
236. ower of the signal gt lt I Q component abs gt lt pilot length bits gt lt IQ offset gt lt IQ imbalance gt POWER VS SLOT Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 192 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 Dee TRACe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 15 pairs of slot slot number of CPICH and level values for 15 slots are always trans ferred lt slot number gt lt level value in dB gt lt slot number gt lt level value in dB gt SYMBOL EVM The number of level values depends on the spreading factor Spreading factor 256 10 values Spreading factor 128 20 values Spreading factor 64 40 values Spreading factor 32 80 values Spreading factor 16 160 values Spreading factor 8 320 values Spreading factor 4 640 values PEAK CODE DOMAIN ERR COMPOSITE EVM 15 pairs of slot slot number of CPICH and values are always transferred PEAK CODE DOMAIN ERR lt slot number gt lt level value in dB gt COMPOSITE EVM lt slot number gt lt value in gt SYMBOL CONST The real and the imaginary part are transferred as a pair lt re 0 gt lt im 0 gt lt re 1 gt lt im 1 gt lt re n gt lt im n gt For the channels have exclusively or Q components in R amp S FS K73 the lt re gt or lt im gt values are 0 depending on the selected component The number of level values depends on the spreading factor Spreading factor 256 10 values Sprea
237. page 82 See x RBW span gt 0 on page 82 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK FACTor lt Factor gt This command defines a step size factor if the center frequency step size is coupled to the span or the resolution bandwidth Parameters lt Factor gt Example Manual operation Range 1 to 100 RST 10 Default unit PCT FREQ CENT STEP LINK FACT 20PCT See CF Stepsize on page 81 See 0 1 Span span gt 0 on page 81 See 0 1 RBW span gt 0 on page 81 See 0 5 Span span gt 0 on page 82 See 0 5 RBW span gt 0 on page 82 SENSe FREQuency OFFSet lt Offset gt This command defines the frequency offset Parameters lt Offset gt Example Manual operation Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 Range 100 GHz to 100 GHz RST 0 Hz Default unit Hz FREQ OFFS 1GHZ See Frontend Settings on page 40 See Frequency Offset on page 40 180 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 SENSe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 SENSe FREQuency SPAN lt Span gt This command defines the frequency span Parameters lt Span gt min span to fmax RST fmax fmax IS specified in the data sheet min span is 10 Hz Example FREQ SPAN 10MHz Manual operation See Span Manual on page 84 SENSe FREQuency SPAN FULL This command sets the frequency span to its maximum Example FREQ SPAN FULL Manual operation See Full Span on page 84 S
238. pilot bits of the channel only valid for the control channel DPCCH CDP Relative Channel relative referred to the total power of the signal Status Status display Codes that are not assigned are marked as inactive channels Meas New lt Channel Detection Settings Creates a new channel table with the settings from the current measurement data sa Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 46 Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 RECENT Measurement data ES S z SE Copy Channel Detection Settings Opens the Copy Channel Table dialog box to copy the currently displayed channel table Enter a name for the new table edit the settings as described for a new table see New on page 45 and select Save Edit Channel Detection Settings Opens the Edit Channel Table dialog box to edit the currently displayed channel table Edit the settings as described for a new table see New on page 45 and select Save Delete Channel Detection Settings Deletes the currently displayed channel table after a message is confirmed Demod Settings Opens the Demodulation Settings dialog box R amp S FSV K73 Configuration of 3GPP FDD UE Measurements Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 Demodulation Evaluation Settings d x Common Settings Code Power Displ Normalize On off Meas Interval Slot Halfslot Eliminate Tail Chips On e Off Code Power D
239. ple INP SEL RF Mode A IQ NF TDS VSA CDMA EVDO WCDMA ADEMOD GSM OFDM OFDMA WiBro WLAN Manual operation See Signal Source on page 73 See Input Path on page 74 8 8 3 TRIGger Subsystem TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence LEVel BBPower lt Level gt This command sets the level of the baseband power trigger source for digital input via the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt Level gt Range 50 dBm to 20 dBm RST 20 DBM Example TRIG LEV BB 30DBM Mode All TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence BBPower HOLDoff lt Value gt This command sets the holding time before the next BB power trigger event for digital input via the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt Value gt RST 150 ns Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 207 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 aaa Se ed Other Commands Referenced in this Manual Example TRIG SOUR BBP Sets the baseband power trigger source TRIG BBP HOLD 200 ns Sets the holding time to 200 ns Mode all TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff lt Value gt This command sets the holding time before the next IF power trigger event Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt Value gt RST 150 ns Example TRIG SOUR IFP Sets the IF power trigger source TRIG IFP HOLD 200 ns Sets the holding time to 200 ns
240. ps if power changes are expected If no power changes are expected the evaluation length is one slot 4096 chips Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 48 R amp S FSV K73 Configuration of 3GPP FDD UE Measurements a ee ee eS Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 On Changes of power are expected Therefore an EVM measurement interval of one slot minus 25 _s 3904 chips is considered Off Changes of power are not expected Therefore an EVM measurement interval of one slot 4096 chips is considered Default settings Remote command SENSe CDPower ETCHips on page 160 Display Config Opens the Display Configuration dialog box in which you can define how the measure ment results are displayed The code domain analyzer can show up to four result diagrams in four different screens windows at one time For each screen you can define which type of result diagram is to be displayed or deactivate the screen temporarily All results are calculated from the same dataset of the recorded signal Thus it is not necessary to restart the measurement in order to switch the display mode The display modes and measurements specified by the 3GPP standard and available in Code Domain Analyzer mode are described in chapter 7 1 3 Measurement Modes in Code Domain Analyzer on page 51 The current configuration of the display i e which screens are displayed and which result diagram is displayed in which screen can be stored
241. r ramping In slots with low relative power to total power the pilot symbols might be detected incorrectly check the signal quality by using the symbol constellation display rrr Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 215 R amp S FSV K73 Glossary 10 Glossary Composite EVM In accordance with the 3GPP specifications the squared error between the real and imaginary parts of the test signal and an ideal reference signal is determined EVM referred to the total signal in a composite EVM measurement DPCCH Dedicated physical control channel control channel The DPCCH contains pilot TFCI TPC and FBI bits The control channel is assumed to be present in every signal in R amp S FS K73 DPDCH Dedicated physical data channel data channel The data chan nels only contain data bits Data channels for user equipment signals are assigned a certain scheme defined in 3GPP specifi cations Inactive Channel Threshold Minimum power that a single channel must have as compared to the total signal to be recognized as an active channel Peak Code Domain Error In accordance with the 3GPP specifications the error between the test signal and the ideal reference signal is projected onto the classes of the different spreading factors in the case of a peak code domain measurement Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 216 R amp S FSV K73 List of Commands List of Commands C
242. rating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 69 R amp S FSV K73 Configuration of 3GPP FDD UE Measurements Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 Peak Sets the active marker delta marker to the highest maximum of the trace Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum PEAK on page 118 Next Peak Sets the active marker delta marker to the next maximum of the selected trace Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum NEXT on page 117 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum NEXT on page 132 Next Peak Mode Selects the mode of the Next Peak softkey Three settings are available lt Sets the active marker delta marker to the next maximum left to the marker of the selected trace abs Sets the active marker delta marker to the next lower maximum of the selected trace gt Sets the active marker delta marker to the next maximum right to the marker of the selected trace Remote command CALC MARK MAX LEFT lt CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum LEFT on page 117 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum LEFT on page 132 CALC MARK MAX RIGH gt CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt on page 118 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt on page 133 CALC DELT MAX NEXT abs CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum NEXT on page 117 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum NEXT on page 132
243. reeeen 216 Inherent noise COMECON avisenes nea aunan ea deN E aN Input Output menu Input sample rate Digital lQ EE Invert Q wee IQ capture settings IQ Capture Settings Ee E Ee ee IQ imbalance os JEE eege eege key Auto Scrambling Code ccccceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 72 AUTOSET d FREQ E MKR Key L level AX S sessasdetessdveiceisceesaaieonsestasnnwnsevsieadssdeatdbecavetenietayootdves 87 display range E 86 87 ANGE wes sssssecesegcoednceesssecetssdua feesveaveeeevGaseiieiecixe 86 87 Level RRETEFENGE EE 41 61 85 Level Unit Digital UO Interface remote control ee 204 Digitall ME 74 Lower case COMMANAS ccceceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetees 105 Lower Level Hysteresis SOMKCY ariiraa aianei oain 73 marker TEE EE Max Hold trace mode gt maximum search Meas Interval t EE 48 menu T le 80 Span i Sweep Menu ele EE Bandwidth Min Hold trace mode MINIMUM search cccceeeesssseeeeee ceeseeeeseesesetstteaaeeeeeees modulation DND eege SEENEN 57 N Negative Peak detector cccccceeeeeceeeeteeeteeeeeeeeeeeeees 28 New Channel Table ssssesssesssesssanaananannataninnnnerrenennnnn ene 44 noise CORPO CHONN E 90 source external 73 101 No of Active Chan w 56 No of Pilot BitS 0 0 0 cece cccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 56 Normalize LE 48 O OCCUPIES bandwidth s s
244. referenced to 1 Hz band width CALC MARK FUNC POW SEL ACP Switches on adjacent channel power measurement CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion WCDPower MS RESult lt ResultType gt This command queries the measured and calculated results of the 3GPP FDD UE code domain power measurement Suffix lt n gt lt m gt Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 irrelevant irrelevant 126 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Query parameters lt ResultType gt PTOTal TFRame MACCuracy EVMRms CERRor SRATe CDPabsolute QOFfset MTYPe RHO CMAPping FERRor TOFFset PCDerror EVMPeak CSLot CHANnel CDPRelative QIMbalance PSYMbol ACHannels MPIC PTOTal total power TFRame trigger to frame MACCuracy composite EVM EVMRms error vector magnitude RMS CERRor chip rate error SRATe symbol rate CDPabsolute channel power absolute IQOFfset IO offset MTYPe modulation type BPSK I 0 BPSK Q 1 4PAM I 6 4PAM Q 7 NONE 15 RHO rho value for every slot CMAPping Channel component FERRor frequency error in Hz TOFFset timing offset PCDerror peak code domain error EVMPeak error vector magnitude peak CSLot channel slot number CHANnel channel number CDPRelative Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 127 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 REENEN CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K
245. relevant 1 4 the power class to be evaluated ON OFF RST OFF 144 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Example CALC LIM ESP PCL1 ON Activates the first defined power class CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum PCLass lt Class gt COUNt lt NoPowerClasses gt This command sets the number of power classes to be defined Suffix lt n gt irrelevant lt k gt irrelevant lt Class gt irrelevant Parameters lt NoPowerClasses gt 1 to4 RST 1 Example CALC LIM ESP PCL COUN 2 Two power classes can be defined CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum PCLass lt Class gt LIMit STATe lt State gt This command defines which limits are evaluated in the measurement Suffix lt n gt irrelevant lt k gt irrelevant lt Class gt 1 4 the power class to be evaluated Parameters lt State gt ABSolute RELative AND OR ABSolute Evaluates only limit lines with absolute power values RELative Evaluates only limit lines with relative power values AND Evaluates limit lines with relative and absolute power values A negative result is returned if both limits fail OR Evaluates limit lines with relative and absolute power values A negative result is returned if at least one limit failed RST REL Example CALC LIM ESP PCL LIM ABS Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 145 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands
246. ried The Channel DPCCH may only be defined once If channel DPCCH is missing in the command it is automatically added at the end of the table Prior to this command the name of the chan nel table has to be defined with the command CONF WCDP CTAB NAME Example CONF WCDP MS CTAB DATA 8 0 0 5 1 0 00 4 1 1 0 1 0 00 4 1 0 0 1 0 00 The following channels are defined DPCCH and two data chan nels with 960 ksps Mode WCDMA CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle DATA HSDPcch lt State gt This command activates ON or deactivates OFF the HS DPCCH entry in a predefined channel table Parameters lt State gt RST ON Example CONF WCDP MS CTAB DATA HSDP ON Mode WCDMA CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle COMMent lt Comment gt This command defines a comment for the selected channel table Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 156 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 CONFigure WCDPower subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Prior to this command the name of the channel table has to be defined with command CONF WCDP MS CTAB NAME and the values of the table have to be defined with com mand CONF WCDP MS CTAB DATA Parameters lt Comment gt Example CONF WCDP MS CTAB COMM Comment for table 1 Mode WCDMA CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle COPY lt FileName gt This command copies one channel table onto another one The channel table to be cop ied is selected with command CONF WCDP MS CTAB NA
247. rol cecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 175 Res BW Auto remote control 176 177 Res BW Manual remote control 175 176 Save Evaluation List remote control 06 212 Search Limits remote control SO 121 Search Lim Off remote control eeeeeees Select TT E Select 1 2 3 4 remote control Gs e Select Trace remote Control STE aTe E Settings Overview e Single Meas remote control ceeeeeeeeeereees Single Sweep remote Control ceeeeeeeeeeees Span RBW Auto 50 ee Span RBW Manual sasieeeeeeeseeeeseeesrirsesrrrnerrrrnserns Span Manwall ege gdgggeaeketet e Steed Tni Span Manual remote control d Spectrum Emission Mask s es eener SPECTRUM EM MASK nsiaeeeeeeeirirererrirereernnens Start remote control Start Frequency remote control Stop d e Stop remote Control c ccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeees Stop Frequency remote control eeeeeeeeeees Sweep Count Sweep POMS aenescens Sweep Points remote control eeeeeeeees Sweeptime Auto remote control sg Trace 1 2 3 4 5 6 remote control sesse seeeeeeeee 196 Trace Mode remote control seeseeeee enne 197 Trg Gate Polarity Pos Neg we 43 Trg Gate Polarity Pos Neg remote control 182 209 Trg Gate Source remote control 0 0 0 eee 209 Trigger Holdoff remote control eeeeeeee 208 Trigger Out Low H
248. rt Guide e Operating Manuals for base unit and options e Service Manual e Online Help e Release Notes Quick Start Guide This manual is delivered with the instrument in printed form and in PDF format on the CD It provides the information needed to set up and start working with the instrument Basic operations and basic measurements are described Also a brief introduction to remote control is given The manual includes general information e g Safety Instruc tions and the following chapters Chapter 1 Introduction General information Chapter 2 Front and Rear Panel Chapter 3 Preparing for Use Chapter 4 Firmware Update and Installation of Firmware Options Chapter 5 Basic Operations Chapter 6 Basic Measurement Examples Chapter 7 Brief Introduction to Remote Control Appendix Printer Interface Appendix LAN Interface Operating Manuals The Operating Manuals are a supplement to the Quick Start Guide Operating Manuals are provided for the base unit and each additional software option The Operating Manual for the base unit provides basic information on operating the R amp S FSV in general and the Spectrum mode in particular Furthermore the software options that enhance the basic functionality for various measurement modes are descri bed here The set of measurement examples in the Quick Start Guide is expanded by more advanced measurement examples In addition to the brief introduction to
249. rtant parameters for the 3GPP FDD UE user equipment tests are sum marized in the root menu of the R amp S FSV K73 option and explained below using the softkey functions The root menu is available by pressing the 3GPP FDD UE softkey in the Select Mode menu the MEAS key or the HOME key The Code Domain Analyzer softkey activates the code domain analyzer measurement mode and opens the submenus for setting the measurement The Power Ch Power ACLR Spectrum Emission Mask Occupied Bandwidth CCDF and RF Combi softkeys activate tests in the analyzer mode Pressing the associated softkey performs the settings required by 3GPP specifications A subsequent modification of settings is possible It is possible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys If a softkey is only available with a special option model or measurement mode this information is delivered in the corresponding softkey description chapter 7 1 Code Domain Analyzer Meas urements K73 on page 35 chapter 7 2 1 Output Power Measurements on page 77 Activates the code domain measurement mode and opens another submenu for selecting and configuring the parameters All other menus of the R amp S FSV are adapted to the functions of the code domain measurement mode Activates the channel power measurement with defined settings in the analyzer mode chapter 7 2 3 Adjacent Channel Power ACLR on page 78 Activat
250. rument Functions 3GPP User Equipment Measurements KEE EE _ Further Information Filter Bandwidth Filter Type Application 6 kHz CFiLter 6 kHz a 0 2 RRC APCO 8 5 kHz CFiLter ETS300 113 12 5 kHz channels 9 kHz CFiLter AM Radio 10 kHz CFiLter 12 5 kHz CFILter CDMAone 14 kHz CFILter ETS300 113 20 kHz channels 15 kHz CFILter 16 kHz CFILter ETS300 113 25 kHz channels 18 kHz a 0 35 RRC TETRA 20 kHz CFILter 21 kHz CFILter PDC 24 3 kHz a 0 35 RRC IS 136 25 kHz CFILter 30 kHz CFILter CDPD CDMAone 50 kHz CFILter 100 kHz CFILter 150 kHz CFILter FM Radio 192 kHz CFILter PHS 200 kHz CFILter 300 kHz CFILter 500 kHz CFILter J 83 8 VSB DVB USA 1 MHz CFILter CDMAone 1 228 MHz CFILter CDMAone 1 28 MHz a 0 22 RRC 1 5 MHz CFlLter DAB 2 MHz CFlLter 3 MHz CFiLter 3 75 MHz CFiLter 3 84 MHz a 0 22 RRC W CDMA 3GPP eee Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 32 R amp S FSV K73 Instrument Functions 3GPP User Equipment Measurements Further Information Filter Bandwidth Filter Type Application 4 096 MHz a 0 22 RRC W CDMA NTT DOCoMo 5 MHz CFiLter 20 MHz CFiLter 28 MHz CFiLter 40 MHz CFiLter 6 3 7 ASCII File Export Format The data of the file header consist of three columns each separated by a semicolon parameter name numeric value basic unit The
251. rument depends on the selected center frequency resolution bandwidth and level setting Therefore the cor rection function is disabled whenever one of these parameters is changed A disable message is displayed on the screen Noise correc tion must be switched on again manually after the change OFF No noise correction is performed AUTO Noise correction is performed After a parameter change noise correc tion is restarted automatically and a new correction measurement is performed Remote command SENSe POWer NCORrection on page 172 Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 90 R amp S FSV K73 Configuration of 3GPP FDD UE Measurements 7 2 6 4 RF Measurements Input AC DC Toggles the RF input of the R amp S FSV between AC and DC coupling This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command INPut COUPling on page 201 Input 50 0 75 Q Uses 50 Q or 75 Q as reference impedance for the measured levels Default setting is 50 Q The setting 75 Q should be selected if the 50 Q input impedance is transformed to a higher impedance using a 75 Q adapter of the RAZ type 25 Q in series to the input impedance of the instrument The correction value in this case is 1 76 dB 10 log 75 O 50 Q All levels specified in this Operating Manual refer to the default setting of the instrument 50 Q This function is not available for input from the R amp
252. s Note that most commands in the SENSe subsystem are identical to the base unit only the commands specific to this option are described here SENSe CDPower Gubesvstem eee eecccneeeeeeeeeccneeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeiaeeeeeeeeeeaas 159 SENSe POWer SUDSYSIOM nienie dE TEE SERA 167 Other SENSe Commands Referenced in this Manual 173 SENSe CDPower Subsystem This subsystem controls the parameters for the code domain mode The numeric suffix in SENSe is not significant in this subsystem SENSe CDPoWerBASE E 159 Eer Re e RE 160 SENSE ege Te 160 IGENGejCDbower il Ter STATel cece cane ae aaa aeaeegeeeeeeeeeeeeesesasaaaaaaaneneeeees 161 SENS CDPower FRAME VALUE EE 161 SENSe CDPowerFRAMe il VALUG iiiaae aaia 161 SENSE JC Eelere iiaia a ANE EE AREE EAA 161 AECID Ne e E E E E vase iden dse te innaaae ever eaee hee test aan 162 SENS ICD PawermlC ThreshiGle neregana e teadeca ance danedeie ddan Aaaa 162 SENSe ICD PoWerlO LENIN icc ieii i E Eed a A 162 SENS CDPower LOCODE TYPE cn iio tec gcecicese Ail iniinna iaia aka idn Eriniin Epa aiaia arinaa ia ad iani 163 SENSe CDPower LCODe SEARch IMMediate ceceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeaeaeeaeaeeaeneneteeeees 163 SENSe COPowerL CODe SEARGHILIST 4isi0 0e7EeNER EEN SEENEN AER 163 SENSe CDPoWerLCODe VALUE os cic cc cich cence e geeCdgdN SEENEN 164 SENSe CDPower LEVel ADJUSt sinisin nanena adanan anana aak Kaaa aani aaa 164 SENS amp CDPOWweEr MAPPING D 165 SENSe
253. sadinane daaa aaa aa 121 CALCU AMAR KO E A a Ea e NEE 121 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMits STAT 2c cccccecceeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeaaaaaeeneneees 121 CAL Culate nz M AbkercmzX GL lMits Z0O0OM 122 CALC UlateSnet MARKERS EEN eege e E AE a 122 Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 116 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF This command all markers off including delta markers and marker measurement func tions Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt depends on mode irrelevant Example CALC MARK AOFF Switches off all markers Usage Event Manual operation See Al Marker Off on page 69 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum LEFT This command positions a marker to the next smaller trace maximum on the left of the current position i e in descending X values If no next smaller maximum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC MARK2 MAN LEFT Positions marker 2 to the next lower maximum value to the left of the current value Usage Event Manual operation See Next Peak Mode on page 70 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum NEXT This command positions the marker to th
254. scillator is set to provide the spectrum quasi analog from the start to the stop frequency Remote command SWE TYPE SWE see SENSe SWEep TYPE on page 183 FFT Sweep Type Sets the Sweep Type to FFT mode The FFT sweep mode samples on a defined frequency value and transforms it to the spectrum by fast Fourier transformation FFT FFT is not available when using 5 Pole filters Channel filters or RRC filters In this case sweep mode is used Note The same applies when a tracking generator internal or external options R amp S FSV B9 B10 is active Remote command SWE TYPE FFT see SENSe SWEep TYPE on page 183 Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 99 R amp S FSV K73 Configuration of 3GPP FDD UE Measurements REENERT RF Measurements Auto Sweep Type Automatically sets the fastest available Sweep Type for the current measurement Auto mode is set by default Remote command SWE TYPE AUTO see SENSe SWEep TYPE on page 183 FFT Filter Mode Sweep Type Defines the filter mode to be used for FFT filters by defining the partial span size The partial span is the span which is covered by one FFT analysis Auto FFT Filter Mode Sweep Type The firmware determines whether to use wide or narrow filters to obtain the best mea surement results Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution FFT on page 176 Narrow
255. see Code Domain Power on page 51 e Code Domain Channel Table see Composite EVM RMS on page 52 e Code Domain Result Summary see Result Summary on page 55 e Trace Statistics Avg Min Max in Code Domain Analyzer Mode see Result Sum mary on page 55 e Composite EVM see Composite EVM RMS on page 52 e Peak Code Domain Error see Peak Code Domain Error on page 52 e Power vs Slot see Power vs Slot on page 54 e Composite Const see Composite Constellation on page 54 e Code Domain Error see Code Domain Error Power on page 57 e Power vs Symbol see Power vs Symbol on page 59 e Symbol Const see Symbol Constellation on page 59 e Symbol EVM see Symbol EVM on page 59 e Symbol Magnitude Error see Symbol Magnitude Error on page 55 e Symbol Phase Error see Symbol Phase Error on page 55 e Bitstream see Bitstream on page 59 e Freq Err vs Slot see Freq Err vs Slot on page 59 e Phase Discontinuity see Phase Discontinuity vs Slot on page 60 The code domain power measurements are performed as specified by the 3GPP stand ards A signal section of approx 20 ms is recorded for analysis and then searched through to find the start of a 3GPP FDD UE frame If a frame start is found in the signal the code domain power analysis is performed for a complete frame starting from slot 0 The dif ferent result diagrams are calculated from the recorded IQ data set Therefore it is not
256. selected marker is returned Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 122 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 8 2 5 CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode CALC MARK2 ON Switches marker 2 INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end CALC MARK2 Y Outputs the measured value of marker 2 Usage Query only Manual operation See Marker 1 2 3 4 on page 68 See Select 1 2 3 4 A on page 69 See CPICH on page 70 See PCCPCH on page 70 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer FUNCtion subsystem The CALCulate lt n gt MARKer FUNCtion subsystem checks the marker functions in the instrument CAL Culate nz M Abker mzEUNGCHonCPich 123 CALCulate lt p gt MARKer lt in gt FUNCHONIPOCCPEN siina 123 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer RESUIt ccccccccescceseseceeeeecaseeeeaseeeaees 124 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer SEL Ct cccccscccescececceceeeseesecceeeeeeeaees 125 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion WCDPower MS RESUuIt cccsscccssseceeceeeeseeeeees 126 CAL Culate nz M Abker mzEUNGCHon ZO0OM 128 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CPICh This command sets the marker to channel 0 This command is only available in code domain power and code domain error power result diagrams as window depends on the selected display mode for which the marker is to be valid lt m g
257. sion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC MARK2 MAX RIGH Positions marker 2 to the next lower maximum value to the right of the current value Usage Event Manual operation See Next Peak Mode on page 70 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum LEFT This command positions a marker to the next higher trace minimum on the left of the current value i e in descending X direction If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 118 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 lt m gt Example Usage Manual operation CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Selects the marker CALC MARK2 MIN Positions marker 2 to the minimum value of the trace CALC MARK2 MIN LEFT Positions marker 2 to the next higher minimum value to the left of the current value Event See Next Min Mode on page 71 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum NEXT This command positions ae marker to the next higher trace minimum If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced
258. solution filter For detailed information on filters see chapter 6 3 5 Selecting the Appropriate Filter Type on page 30 and chapter 6 3 6 List of Available RRC and Channel Filters on page 31 When changing the filter type the next larger filter bandwidth is selected if the same filter bandwidth is not available for the new filter type 5 Pole filters are not available when using the sweep type FFT Parameters lt FilterType gt NORMal Gaussian filters CFiLter channel filters RRC RRC filters P5 5 Pole filters RST NORMal Example BAND TYPE NORM Manual operation See Filter Type on page 97 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo lt Bandwidth gt This command defines the video bandwidth The available video bandwidths are speci fied in the data sheet Parameters lt Bandwidth gt refer to data sheet RST AUTO is set to ON Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 177 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 De SENSe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Example BAND VID 10 kHz Manual operation See Video BW Manual on page 92 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo AUTO lt State gt This command couples and decouples the VBW to the RBW Use SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth V1IDeo RATio to define the ratio VBW RBW Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON Example BAND VID AUTO OFF Manual operation See Video BW Manual on page 92 See Video BW Auto on page 93 See Coupling
259. splay a help topic press the ENTER key The View tab with the corresponding help topic is displayed e To change to the next tab press the tab on the touchscreen Navigating in the help topics e To scroll through a page use the rotary knob or the UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW keys e To jump to the linked topic press the link text on the touchscreen Searching for a topic 1 Change to the Index tab Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 8 R amp S FSV K73 Preface DESSERT How to Use the Help System 2 Enter the first characters of the topic you are interested in The entries starting with these characters are displayed 3 Change the focus by pressing the ENTER key 4 Select the suitable keyword by using the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW keys or the rotary knob 5 Press the ENTER key to display the help topic The View tab with the corresponding help topic is displayed Changing the zoom 1 Change to the Zoom tab 2 Set the zoom using the rotary knob Four settings are available 1 4 The smallest size is selected by number 1 the largest size is selected by number 4 Closing the help window gt Press the ESC key or a function key on the front panel Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 9 R amp S FSV K73 Introduction 2 Introduction This section contains all information required for operation of an R amp S FSV equipped with Application Firmware R amp S FSV K73 It covers operation via menus and the re
260. splayed in the selected unit Unit softkey Delta markers are displayed in dB referenced to the power value at the position of marker 1 Remote command DISP TRAC Y SPAC LDB see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 199 Unit Opens the Unit submenu to select the unit for the level axis The default setting is dBm If a transducer is switched on the softkey is not available Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 87 R amp S FSV K73 Configuration of 3GPP FDD UE Measurements BREET RF Measurements In general the signal analyzer measures the signal voltage at the RF input The level display is calibrated in RMS values of an unmodulated sine wave signal In the default state the level is displayed at a power of 1 mW dBm Via the known input impedance 50 Q or 75 Q conversion to other units is possible The following units are available and directly convertible e dBm dBmvV dBuV dBA dBpW Volt Ampere Watt Remote command CALCulate lt n gt UNIT POWer on page 153 Preamp On Off Switches the preamplifier on and off If option R amp S FSV B22 is installed the preamplifier is only active below 7 GHz If option R amp S FSV B24 is installed the preamplifier is active for all frequencies This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command INPut GAIN STATe on page 206 RF Atten Manual Mech Att Manual Opens an edit dial
261. surement CALC LIM ACP ACH STAT ON Switches on the limit check for the adjacent channels INIT WAI Starts a new measurement and waits for the sweep end CALC LIM ACP ACH RES Queries the limit check result in the adjacent channels CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel RELative STATe lt State gt This command activates the limit check for the relative limit value of the adjacent channel when adjacent channel power measurement is performed Before this command the limit check must be activated using CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower STATe The result can be queried with CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel RESult Note that a complete measurement must be performed between switching on the limit check and the result query since otherwise no correct results are available Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt k gt irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 139 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Example CALC LIM ACP ACH 30DB 30DB Sets the relative limit value for the power in the lower and upper adjacent channel to 30 dB below the channel power CALC LIM ACP ACH ABS 35DBM 35DBM Sets the absolute limit value for the power in the lower and upper adjacent channel to 35 dBm CALC LIM ACP
262. t absolute scaling XTIM CDP PVSYmbol Result display of power versus symbol XPOW CDP RATio Result display of code domain power as bar graph relative scal ing XTIM CDP SYMB CONStellation Result display of symbol constellation XTIM CDP SYMB EVM Result display of symbol error vector magnitude XTIMe CDPower SYMBol EVM MAGNitude Result display of the symbol magnitude error XTIMe CDPower SYMBol EVM PHASe Result display of the symbol phase error RST depends on the active screen Example CALC3 FEED XTIM CDP ERR SUMM Activates the result summary in screen C Mode WCDMA 8 2 3 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit ACPower Subsystem The CALCulate lt n gt LIMit ACPower subsystem defines limit checking for adjacent chan nel power measurements CALCulate lt n gt LIMit1 ACPower STAT s cssececeeecececeneaneeeeeseesenenaeeeeseseenaeaeauenenees 111 CAL Culate nzLIMI ACbower AC Hannelt REI atvel 111 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit1 ACPower ACHannel RELative STATE cccecceceeeteeeeeeeeeeaeaeeees 112 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit1 ACPower AC Hannel ABSolute ccccccccecesccccsesecessscecesceeceeseseanees 112 CAL Culate nzLUMI ACPowerACHannelAbGolute zrAaTe 113 CAL Culate nzLUMIT ACPowerACHannelREGut z 113 CAL Culate nz IM ACbower Al Temate chztEREL ativel 114 CAL Culate nz IM ACbower Al Temate chzEREL ativelSTAaTe eneren 114 CAL Culate nzLUMI ACbowerAlTemate i JizAbBGolute 115 CAL Culate n
263. t marker number only 1 allowed Example CALC MARK FUNC CPIC Mode WCDMA Manual operation See CPICH on page 70 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion PCCPch This command sets the marker to the position of the PCCPCH This command is only available in code domain power and code domain error power result diagrams Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 123 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Se window depends on the selected display mode for which the marker is to be valid lt m gt marker number only 1 allowed Example CALC MARK FUNC PCCP Mode WCDMA Manual operation See PCCPCH on page 70 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer RESult lt ResultType gt This command queries the result of the performed power measurement in the window specified by the suffix lt n gt If necessary the measurement is switched on prior to the query The channel spacings and channel bandwidths are configured in the SENSe POWer subsystem To obtain a correct result a complete sweep with synchronization to the end of the sweep must be performed before a query is output Synchronization is possible only in the single sweep mode Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 124 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 CALCulate subsystem R amp
264. te This command switches the spurious limit check off If you want to read out the values peak values including the delta to a limit you have to switch on the limit again This command is only for FSP compatibility and not necessary to use on the R amp S FSV Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 147 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Example CALC PSE Starts to determine the list CALCulate lt n gt PEAKsearch PSEarch AUTO lt State gt This command activates or deactivates the list evaluation Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON Example CALC ESP PSE AUTO OFF Deactivates the list evaluation CALCulate lt n gt PEAKsearch PSEarch MARGin lt Margin gt This command sets the margin used for the limit check peak search Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window Parameters lt Margin gt 200 to 200 dB RST 200 dB Example CALC ESP PSE MARG 100 Sets the margin to 100 dB CALCulate lt n gt PEAKsearch PSEarch PSHow This command marks all peaks with blue squares in the diagram Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC ESP PSE PSH ON Marks all peaks with blue squares Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 148 R amp S FSV K73 Remot
265. te command INPut COUPling on page 201 Softkeys of the Sweep Menu SWEEP key R amp S FSV K73 The menu of the SWEEP key contains options to switch between single measurement and continuous measurement and to control individual measurements Some softkey functions are not available in CDP mode Refer to the description of the SWEEP key in the base unit for information on the other softkeys available for RF meas urements In Code Domain Analyzer mode the following functions are available in the submenu Continuous SWE EE 64 SINGIG SWS E 64 Continue Single SWEGD EE 64 Sweep OMIM EE 65 Continuous Sweep Sets the continuous sweep mode the sweep takes place continuously according to the trigger settings This is the default setting The trace averaging is determined by the sweep count value see the Sweep Count softkey Sweep Count on page 65 Remote command INIT CONT ON see INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 211 Single Sweep Sets the single sweep mode after triggering starts the number of sweeps that are defined by using the Sweep Count softkey The measurement stops after the defined number of sweeps has been performed Remote command INIT CONT OFF see INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 211 Continue Single Sweep Repeats the number of sweeps set by using the Sweep Count softkey without deleting the trace of the last measurement This is particularly of interest when using the trace configurations Av
266. tector and VBW If the RMS detector is selected the video bandwidth in the hardware is bypassed Thus duplicate trace averaging with small VBWs and RMS detector no longer occurs However the VBW is still considered when calculating the sweep time This leads to a longer sweep time for small VBW values Thus you can reduce the VBW value to achieve more stable trace curves even when using an RMS detector Normally if the RMS detector is used the sweep time should be increased to get more stable trace curves 6 3 4 Trace Mode Overview The traces can be activated individually for a measurement or frozen after completion of a measurement Traces that are not activate are hidden Each time the trace mode is changed the selected trace memory is cleared The R amp S FSV offers 6 different trace modes Clear Write Overwrite mode the trace is overwritten by each sweep This is the default setting All available detectors can be selected Remote command DISP TRAC MODE WRIT see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 195 Max Hold The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and displayed The R amp S FSV saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is greater than the previous one The detector is automatically set to Positive Peak This mode is especially useful with modulated or pulsed signals The signal spectrum is filled up upon each sweep until all signal components are detected i
267. the gate delay time has elapsed Neg Edge triggering the sweep is continued on a 0 to 1 transition for the gate length duration after the gate delay time has elapsed Remote command TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SLOPe on page 209 Trigger Offset IQ Capture Settings Opens an edit dialog box to enter the time offset between the trigger signal and the start of the sweep offset gt 0 Start of the sweep is delayed offset lt 0 Sweep starts earlier pre trigger Only possible for span 0 e g UO Analyzer mode and gated trigger switched off Maximum allowed range limited by the sweep time pretriggerimax sweep time When using the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 with UO Analyzer mode the maximum range is limited by the number of pretrigger samples See the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 description in the base unit Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 43 R amp S FSV K73 Configuration of 3GPP FDD UE Measurements a SS SS SS SSS ee Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 In the External or IF Power trigger mode a common input signal is used for both trigger and gate Therefore changes to the gate delay will affect the trigger delay trigger offset as well Remote command TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence HOLDoff TIME on page 208 Sync Scrambling Settings Opens the Descrambling Sync Search Settings dialog box Descrambling Sync Search Settings
268. tical position of the reference The unit and value range is variable RST Fixed reference OFF Example CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO Y 10dBm Sets the reference point level for delta markers to 10 dBm CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FlXed STATe lt State gt This command switches the relative measurement to a fixed reference value on or off Marker 1 is activated previously and a peak search is performed if necessary If marker 1 is activated its position becomes the reference point for the measurement The refer ence point can then be modified with the CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FIXed RPOint X commands and CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion F1Xed RPOint Y independently of the position of marker 1 and of a trace It applies to all delta markers as long as the function is active Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT FUNC FIX ON Switches on the measurement with fixed reference value for all delta markers CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO X 128 MHZ Sets the frequency reference to 128 MHz CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO Y 30 DBM Sets the reference level to 30 dBm CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion PNOise AUTO lt State gt This command turns an automatic peak search for the fixed reference marker at the end of a sweep on and off Suffix
269. tings on page 47 the magnitude error is displayed for all chips of the selected slot For the Meas Interval Halfslot see Demod Settings on page 47 the magnitude error is displayed for the chips of one half slot The selected slot halfslot can be varied Possible entries are 0 to 14 for Slot and 0 to 29 for Halfslot The magnitude error is calculated as the difference between the magnitudes of the received and reference signal The reference signal is estimated out of the channel con figurations of all active channels The magnitude error is given in percent referred to the square root of the mean power of the reference signal MAG NN 100 NW 2560 xe 0 N 1 2 We Ix where MAG magnitude error of chip number k Sk complex chip value of received signal Xk complex chip value of reference signal k index number of the evaluated chip N number of chips at each CPICH slot n index number for mean power calculation of reference signal Remote command CALC FEED XTIM CDP CHIP MAGN see chapter 8 2 2 CALCulate FEED subsys tem on page 108 Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 53 R amp S FSV K73 Configuration of 3GPP FDD UE Measurements a SSS SSS SS SES ESS a a ee ee Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 Phase Error vs Chip For the Meas Interval Slot see Demod Settings on page 47 the phase error is dis played for all chips of the selected slot For the Meas Interval
270. tion type Individual symbols in the bit stream may be invalid depending on the channel type and the bit rate symbols without power In this case the character 9 is returned Unit 0 Value range 0 1 7 9 0 Low state of a transmitted bit 1 High state of a transmitted bit 6 Suppressed symbol of a HS DPCCH slot 9 Bit of an inactive channel Bits per slot NBitPerSymb 2 Number of symbols Ngymp 150 2 8 Code Class Number of bits Neit Nsymb Neitpersymb Format Bit Biton Bitio Bit Bitzo Bity Bitysymb o Bitysymb 1 Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 186 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 i a TRACe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window Example CALC2 FEED XTIM CDP BSTReam Sets the result display for screen B to bitstream TRAC2 DATA ABITstream2 Returns the bit streams of all 15 slots in trace 2 screen B one after the other Usage Query only Mode WCDMA TRACe lt n gt DATA CEVM This command reads the root mean square RMS value of the error vector magnitude EVMrpms The measurement interval of the RMS value depends on analyzer settings and the channel configuration of the applied signal refer to SENSe CDPower ETCHips on page 160 The information of the chip limits of the used measurement inter val are given for each slot Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window Return values Resu
271. tionally in the command or omitted as well Parameters in braces can be incorporated optionally in the command either not at all once or several times Description of Parameters Due to the standardization the parameter section of SCPI commands consists always of the same syntactical elements SCPI has therefore specified a series of definitions M Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 105 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 which are used in the tables of commands In the tables these established definitions are indicated in angled brackets lt gt and is briefly explained in the following For details see the chapter SCPI Command Structure in the base unit description lt Boolean gt This keyword refers to parameters which can adopt two states on and off The off state may either be indicated by the keyword OFF or by the numeric value 0 the on state is indicated by ON or any numeric value other than zero Parameter queries are always returned the numeric value 0 or 1 lt numeric_value gt lt num gt These keywords mark parameters which may be entered as numeric values or be set using specific keywords character data The following keywords given below are per mitted e MAXimum This keyword sets the parameter to the largest possible value e MINimum This keyword sets the parameter to the smallest possible value e DEF
272. to the CPICH dBm or the total power of the signal Timing offset Offset between the start of the first slot of the channel and the start of the analyzed 3GPP FDD UE frame In CODE CHAN AUTO SEARCH mode a data channel is designated as active if its power has a minimum value compared to the total power of the signal and if a minimum signal noise ratio is maintained within the channel In CODE CHAN PREDEFINED mode each data channel that is included in the user defined channel table is considered to be active In the R amp S FSV K73 the display configuration can be set to show quarter screens In such a case the channel table is reduced to Channel Code SF State and Power Abs Remote command CALC FEED XTIM CDP ERR CTAB see chapter 8 2 2 CALCulate FEED subsys tem on page 108 SS ee Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 58 R amp S FSV K73 Configuration of 3GPP FDD UE Measurements REESEN Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 Power vs Symbol The Power vs Symbol measurement shows the power over the symbol number for the selected channel and the selected slot The power is not averaged here The trace is drawn using a histogram line algorithm i e only vertical and horizontal lines no diagonal linear Interpolation polygon interpolation Surfaces are NOT filled This measurement displays Power versus Symbol for one single channel and for one single slot Remote command CALC FEED
273. tput List of 2560 vector error values of all chips at the selected slot Suffix lt n gt 1 4 irrelevant lt t gt 1 4 trace Return values lt Result gt lt code class gt lt channel number gt lt absolute level gt lt relative level gt lt timing offset gt Commaz separated list with 5 values for each channel the chan nels are output in ascending order sorted by code number i e in the same sequence they are displayed on screen lt code class gt Code class of the channel 2 9 lt channel number gt Code number of the channel 0 511 lt absolute level gt Absolute level of the code channel at the selected channel slot The channel slot can be marked by the SELECTED CPICH slot lt relative level gt Relative level of the code channel at the selected channel slot ref erenced to CPICH or total power The channel slot can be marked by the SELECTED CPICH slot lt timing offset gt Timing offset of the code channel to the frame start The value is measured in chips The step width is 256 chips in the case of code class 2 to 8 and 512 chips in the case of code class 9 0 38400 chips Example TRAC2 DATA TRACE2 Returns the trace data from trace 2 screen B Usage Query only Mode WCDMA Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 194 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 Other Commands Referenced in this Manual 8 8 Other Commands Referenced in this Manual
274. tronic attenuation can be defined separately Note however that both parts must be defined in the same mode i e either both manually or both automatically This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 e To define the mechanical attenuation use the RF Atten Manual Mech Att Manual or RF Atten Auto Mech Att Auto softkeys e To define the electronic attenuation use the El Atten Mode Auto Man softkey Note This function is not available for stop frequencies or center frequencies in zero span gt 7 GHz In this case the electronic and mechanical attenuation are summarized and the electronic attenuation can no longer be defined individually As soon as the stop or center frequency is reduced below 7 GHz this function is available again When the electronic attenuator is switched off the corresponding RF attenuation mode auto manual is automatically activated Remote command INPut EATT AUTO on page 205 El Atten Mode Auto Man This softkey defines whether the electronic attenuator value is to be set automatically or manually If manual mode is selected an edit dialog box is opened to enter the value This softkey is only available with option R amp S FSV B25 and only if the electronic attenu ator has been activated via the El Atten On Off softkey Note This function is not available for stop frequencies or center frequencies in zero span gt 7 GHz In this case
275. ts Remote command SWE TIME AUTO OFF see SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO on page 183 SENSe SWEep TIME on page 182 Sweeptime Auto Couples the sweep time to the span video bandwidth VBW and resolution bandwidth RBW not available for zero span If you change the span resolution bandwidth or video bandwidth the sweep time is automatically adjusted The R amp S FSV always selects the shortest sweep time that is possible without falsifying the signal The maximum level error is lt 0 1 dB compared to using a longer sweep time This softkey is available for measuring the Adjacent Channel Power the Spectrum Emis sion Mask and the Occupied Bandwidth Remote command SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO on page 183 Sweep Type Opens a submenu to define the sweep type This softkey is available for measuring the Signal Power the Adjacent Channel Power and the Occupied Bandwidth This function is not available in IQ Analyzer mode or for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 In frequency sweep mode the analyzer provides several possible methods of sweeping Sweep on page 94 FFT on page 94 not available with 5 Pole filters channel filters or RRC filters see chapter 6 3 5 Selecting the Appropriate Filter Type on page 30 e Auto on page 95 Sweep Sweep Type Sets the Sweep Type to standard analog frequency sweep In the standard sweep mode the local o
276. ually If manual mode is selected an edit dialog box is opened to enter the value This softkey is only available with option R amp S FSV B25 and only if the electronic attenu ator has been activated via the El Atten On Off softkey Note This function is not available for stop frequencies or center frequencies in zero span gt 7 GHz In this case the electronic and mechanical attenuation are summarized and the electronic attenuation can no longer be defined individually As soon as the stop or center frequency is reduced below 7 GHz electronic attenuation is available again If the electronic attenuation was defined manually it must be re defined The attenuation can be varied in 1 dB steps from 0 to 30 dB Other entries are rounded to the next lower integer value To re open the edit dialog box for manual value definition select the Man mode again If the defined reference level cannot be set for the given RF attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is output Remote command INPut EATT AUTO on page 205 INPut EATT on page 205 Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 89 R amp S FSV K73 Configuration of 3GPP FDD UE Measurements BREET RF Measurements Ref Level Offset Opens an edit dialog box to enter the arithmetic level offset This offset is added to the measured level irrespective of the selected unit The scaling of the y axis is changed accordingly The setting range is 2
277. uery of results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer RESult on page 124 Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 78 R amp S FSV K73 Configuration of 3GPP FDD UE Measurements 7 2 4 7 2 5 RF Measurements Occupied Bandwidth The Occupied Bandwidth softkey activates the measurement of the bandwidth that the signal occupies The occupied bandwidth is defined as the bandwidth in which in default settings 99 of the total signal power is to be found The percentage of the signal power to be included in the bandwidth measurement can be changed The occupied bandwidth and the frequency markers are output in the marker info field at the top right edge of the screen as OBW The following user specific settings are not modified on the first access following preset ting e Reference Level Reference Level Offset e Center Frequency Frequency Offset e Input Attenuation Mixer Level e All trigger settings Pressing the Occupied Bandwidth softkey activates the analyzer mode with defined set tings OCCUPIED BANDWIDTH TRACE1 DETECTOR SAMPLE To restore adapted measurement parameters the following level parameters are saved on exiting and are set again on re entering this measurement Level Parameters e RBW VBW e Sweep time e SPAN For further details about the Occupied Bandwidth measurements refer to the description in the base unit Remote CONFigure WCDPower MS MEASurement
278. uipment Measurements Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements 6 Instrument Functions 3GPP User Equipment Measurements The R amp S FSV equipped with the 3GPP User equipment measurement option R amp S FSV K73 performs code domain power measurements on downlink signals according to the 3GPP standard Third Generation Partnership Project FDD mode Signals that meet the conditions for channel configuration of 3GPP standard test models 1 to 5 can be measured including HSDPA and HSUPA signals test model 5 In addition to the code domain power measurements specified by the 3GPP standard the 3GPP user equipment measurements option offers measurements with predefined settings in the frequency domain e g power measurements To open the 3GPP UE menu e Ifthe 3GPP FDD UE mode is not the active measurement mode press the MODE key and select the 3GPP FDD UE softkey e fthe 3GPP FDD UE mode is already active press the MENU key The 3GPP UE menu is displayed 6 1 Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements This chapter describes the menus and softkeys for CDA measurements The Span Bandwidth and Marker Function menus are disabled for measurements in the CDA mode For all other measurements the settings are described together with the mea surement The softkeys are described in chapter 7 2 6 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements K73 on page 80 All other menus are provided as described for the base unit
279. ulate Commande nns 153 Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 128 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 8 2 6 1 CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 CALCulate DELTamarker subsystem CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FIXed RPOINE X cccccccesceceeeeeseesececeeeeeees 129 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzFUNCHont edRbOnty 129 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FIXed STAT 2cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeeeenes 130 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion PNOise AUTO ccceccccecceceeeeeseceeceseseeeees 130 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzFUNGCHonbhOiselGTATel eneren enee 131 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzUNk 131 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzM AximumlEEFT 132 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzMAximumNENT 132 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzM ANimumt PDEAK 132 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzMANimumbRlcGHt 133 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz MiNimum LEET 133 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz MiNimumNENT 133 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz MiNimumf DEA 134 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mz MiNimum RICH 134 CALGulate n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STAT 6 c0escccccecesecscesesensecagedecenesendedentenedeaecnnsecaaeeenes 134 CALCulate nz DEL Tamarkercmz TR ACe 135 CALCu latesn gt DEL Tamarker ama Xeira aa a a Aa a A A aG 135 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X RELAtive cccccceccccssceceeeceeeeeceneeceeeceeseeseceseneeeaees 135 GAL
280. ulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 121 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics RESult lt Trace gt on page 150 7 2 6 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements K73 The following chapter describes the softkeys and menus available for RF measurements in 3GPP FDD UE base station tests All menus not described here are the same as for the base unit see the description there 7 2 6 1 Softkeys of the Frequency Menu The following chapter describes all softkeys available in the Frequency menu It is pos sible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys If a softkey is only available with a special option model or measurement mode this information is provi ded in the corresponding softkey description Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 80 R amp S FSV K73 Configuration of 3GPP FDD UE Measurements i a ss SEE a RF Measurements e EN OF SU TT 81 LGA Sati span SO EEN 81 Dk YY span gt EE 81 GE LEE 82 CS RY ein EE 82 CPi IU EE 82 Us Wl 82 egene eidele SERA eegen ER MINN acta eegent ee eegen ER 8 MAMAN E 83 eer 83 UO EE 83 PRS GUS OY en EE 83 Center Opens an edit dialog box to enter the center frequency The allowed range of values for the center frequency depends on the frequency span span gt 0 SPAN min 2 lt foenter lt fmax SPAN min 2 span 0 0 HZ lt Lanter fmax fmax and span j are specified in the data sheet Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 178
281. unction e g a fast change between over view measurement and detailed measurement is possible Softkeys of the Amplitude Menu The following table shows all softkeys available in the Amplitude menu It is possible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys If a softkey is only avail able with a special option model or measurement mode this information is provided in the corresponding softkey description Ref SVS EE 85 Ee TTT 85 Mabie Een Tk ergeet dee Ee eege 86 L Range Log E 86 L Rang Log 10 dB sett aR ERRE a 86 LRange Logs dB eec aE aE 86 See 87 L Range Log Mangal ge iert 87 L Range Uess NEESS 87 Ee E EE 87 BE ege Ee hee E E reese 87 Preamp OMOT sciaicenecdscisaietietneeeseittadicatiadd See EE EE 88 RF Atten Manual Mech Att Manual 88 RF Atten Auto Mech Att Auto 89 EVAREN OR OR concis aisinar ninga ada eaaa a aaea 89 El Atien Mode AWOMaN j caruso aaa a AATA RS 89 E Me 90 SE Be LL DEE 90 Ee EE 90 Noise CorrectioNi siinon se caacexdaanvahanalaceeane a A aa a A aE a 90 ECA Ee E 91 gl ert ieee Ol 8 EE 91 Ref Level Opens an edit dialog box to enter the reference level in the current unit dBm dBuV etc The reference level is the maximum value the AD converter can handle without distortion of the measured value Signal levels above this value will not be measured correctly which is indicated by the IFOVL status display Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe
282. ure Settings dialog box Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 41 R amp S FSV K73 Configuration of 3GPP FDD UE Measurements Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 x Common Settings Invert Q C On Off RRC Filter On C off Data Capture Settings Frame To Analyze 0 Capture Length 1 Trigger Settings Trigger Source External Free Run Trigger Polarity Positive 7 Negative Trigger Offset 0 0s Invert Q IQ Capture Settings Inverts the sign of the signal s Q component The default setting is OFF Remote command SENSe CDPower QINVert on page 166 RRC Filter IQ Capture Settings Selects if a root raised cosine RRC receiver filter is used or not This feature is useful if the RRC filter is implemented in the device under test DUT ON If an unfiltered WCDMA signal is received normal case the RRC filter should be used to get a correct signal demodulation Default settings OFF If a filtered WCDMA signal is received the RRC filter should not be used to get a correct signal demodulation This is the case if the DUT filters the signal Remote command SENSe CDPower FILTer STATe on page 161 Analysis Mode lt IQ Capture Settings Select a result length of one slot or one complete frame Remote command SENSe CDPower BASE on page 159 Frame To Analyze IQ Capture Settings Enter the Frame to analyze and
283. ution bandwidth The available resolution bandwidths are specified in the data sheet For details on the correlation between resolution bandwidth and filter type refer to chapter 6 3 5 Selecting the Appropriate Filter Type on page 30 Parameters lt Bandwidth gt Example Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 refer to data sheet RST AUTO is set to ON BAND 1 MHz Sets the resolution bandwidth to 1 MHz 175 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 SENSe subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Manual operation See Res BW Manual on page 92 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution AUTO lt State gt This command couples and decouples the resolution bandwidth to the span The automatic coupling adapts the resolution bandwidth to the current frequency span according to the relationship between frequency span and resolution bandwidth The 6 dB bandwidths 200 Hz 9 kHz and 120 kHz and the channel filters available are not set by the automatic coupling Use SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution RATio to define the ratio RBW span Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON Example BAND AUTO OFF Switches off the coupling of the resolution bandwidth to the span Manual operation See Res BW Manual on page 92 See Res BW Auto on page 92 See Coupling Ratio on page 95 See Default Coupling on page 97 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution FFT lt FilterMode gt This command defines t
284. utomatically detected as active channels The two possible channel configurations are summarized below Table 5 1 Channel configuration 1 DPCCH and 1 DPDCH Channel type Number of chan Symbol rate Spreading Mapping to compo nels code s nent DPCCH 1 15 ksps 0 Q DPDCH 1 15 ksps 960 ksps spreading factor 4 Table 5 2 Channel configuration 2 DPCCH and up to 6 DPDCH Channel type Number of channels Symbol rate Spreading code s Mapping to component DPCCH 1 15 ksps 0 Q DPDCH 1 960 ksps 1 DPDCH 1 960 ksps 1 Q DPDCH 1 960 ksps 3 DPDCH 1 960 ksps 3 Q DPDCH 1 960 ksps 2 DPDCH 1 960 ksps 2 Q Table 5 3 Channel configuration 3 DPCCH up to 6 DPDCH and 1 HS DPCCH The channel configuration is as above in table 4 2 On HS DPCCH is added to each channel table Number of Symbol rate all DPDCH Symbol rate Spreading code Mapping to component DPDCH HS DPCCH HS DPCCH HS DPCCH 1 15 960 ksps 15 ksps 64 Q 2 1920 ksps 15 ksps 1 l 3 2880 ksps 15 ksps 32 Q 4 3840 ksps 15 ksps 1 l 5 4800 ksps 15 ksps 32 Q 6 5760 ksps 15 ksps 1 l Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 22 Table 5 4 Channelization code of HS DPCCH Nmax dpdch as defined in subclause 4 2 1 Channelization code Cen 1 Con 256 64 2 4 6 Con 256 1 3 5 Ceon 256 32 R amp S FSV K73 Instrument Functions 3GPP User Eq
285. vate the screen temporarily The current configuration of the display i e which screens are displayed and which result diagram is displayed in which screen can be stored and retrieved later Thus you can easily switch between predefined display configurations All results are calculated from the same dataset of the recorded signal Thus it is not necessary to restart the measurement in order to switch the display mode Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 35 R amp S FSV K73 EEN of 3GPP FDD UE Measurements Code Domain Analyzer Measurements K73 Spectrum Analyzer 3G FDD UE Ref Level 10 00 dBm Freq 413 223738645 MHz Channel 0 2561 Power Relative Att 10 dB 0 Capture Frame SGL Global Result Frame 0 Slot 0 1 AvgLin 0 00 dBm Car 0 00 Hz 0 00 dB 0 Chips The available measurement types and resul eas are described in Measurement Modes in Code Domain Analyzer on page 51 For more information on the display configuration see the description of the Display Config on page 49 softkey Measurement settings The most important measurement settings are displayed in the diagram header For Code Domain Analyzer measurements the following settings are shown Label Description Ref level Reference level defined in Re l on page 41 Att Attenuation Freq Center frequency defined in Center on page 40 Channel Channel with spreading factor and mapping
286. will be used for evaluation RST AUTO Example CALC CDP MAPPING AUTO Mode CDMA WCDMA Manual operation See Select Branch on page 50 Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 107 CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 8 2 2 CALCulate FEED subsystem The CALCulate FEED subsystem selects the result display for the different screens in the code domain analyzer This corresponds to the result display selection in manual operation CALC Ula tess E WEE 108 CALCulate lt n gt FEED lt Evaluation gt This command selects the evaluation mode for the different screens For a description of the evaluation modes see chapter 6 2 Measurements and Result Diagrams on page 25 Suffix lt n gt window R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 Parameters lt Evaluation gt XPOW CDP XPOW CDP ABSolute KXPOW CDP RATio XPOW CDP OVERview XPOWer CDEP XTIMe CDPower CHIP EVM XTIMe CDPower CHIP MAGNitude XTIMe CDPower CHIP PHASe XTIM CDP ERR SUMM XTIM CDP ERR CTABle XTIM CDP ERR PCDomain XTIM CDP MACCuracy XTIM CDP PVSYmbol XTIM CDP COMP CONStellation XTIM CDP FVSLot XTIM CDP PVSLot XTIM CDP PVSLot ABSolute XTIM CDP PVSLot RATio XTIM CDP BSTReam XTIM CDP SYMB CONStellation XTIM CDP SYMB EVM XTIMe CDPower SYMBol EVM PHASe XTIMe CDPower SYMBol EVM MAGNitude XTIM CDP PSVS XPOW
287. y functions of the firmware application R amp S FSV K73 For all other descriptions please refer to the description of the base unit at the beginning of the documentation Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 10 R amp S FSV K73 Measurement Examples R amp S FSV K73 A Measurement Examples R amp S FSV K73 This chapter gives an overview of the Basic Settings in Code Domain Measurement Mode and explains some basic 3GPP FDD user equipment tests It describes how operating and measurement errors can be avoided using correct presetting The meas urements are performed with an R amp S FSV equipped with option R amp S FSV K73 Key settings are shown as examples to avoid measurement errors Following the correct setting the effect of an incorrect setting is shown The following measurements are performed e chapter 3 1 Measurement 1 Measurement of the Signal Channel Power on page 12 e chapter 3 2 Measurement 2 Measurement of the Spectrum Emission Mask on page 13 e chapter 3 3 Measurement 3 Measurement of the Relative Code Domain Power on page 14 e chapter 3 4 Measurement 4 Triggered Measurement of Relative Code Domain Power on page 16 e chapter 3 5 Measurement 5 Measurement of the Composite EVM on page 17 e chapter 3 6 Measurement 6 Measurement of Peak Code Domain Error on page 18 The measurements are performed using the following units and accessories e The R amp S FSV with Application F
288. zLUlMI ACbowerAlTemate i JisAbBGclutez AaTe 115 CAL Culate nzLUMIT ACbowerAlTemate i J1sRESu 116 Operating Manual 1176 7590 02 01 110 R amp S FSV K73 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K73 DEENEN CALCulate subsystem R amp S FSV K73 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit1 ACPower STATe lt State gt This command switches on and off the limit check for adjacent channel power measure ments in the selected measurement window The commands CALCulate lt n gt LIMit ACPower ACHannel STATe or CALCulate lt n gt LIMit ACPower ALTernate STATe must be used in addition to specify whether the limit check is to be performed for the upper lower adjacent channel or for the alternate adjacent channels Suffix lt n gt n irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC LIM ACP ON Mode WCDMA CALCulate lt n gt LIMit1 ACPower ACHannel RELative This command defines the relative limit of the upper lower adjacent channel for adjacent channel power measurements in the selected measurement window The reference value for the relative limit value is the measured channel power It should be noted that the relative limit value has no effect on the limit check as soon as it is below the absolute limit value defined with CALCulate lt n gt LIMit ACPower ACHannel ABSolute This mechanism allows automatic checking of the absolute basic values of adjacent channel power as defined in mobile radio standards Suff

R&S FSV-K73 - Rohde & Schwarz Norway

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&amp;S FSV-K73 - Rohde &amp; Schwarz Norway

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&S FSV-K73 - Rohde & Schwarz Norway